543730
4
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/190
Next page
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
This manual is common to all the models regardless of sufxes of the Model No.
z
W : White model, the standard zoom lens supplied LW : White model, the lens sold separately
K : Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied LK : Black model, the lens sold separately
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual
for future use.
Before using your projector, be sure to read “Read this rst!” (
x
pages 2 to 9).
TQBJ0528
DLP
TM
Projector
Commercial Use
Operating Instructions
Functional Manual
ENGLISH
Model No.
PT-DZ870E
PT-DW830E
PT-DX100E
2 - ENGLISH
Read this rst!
Read this rst!
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
WARNING: To prevent damage which may result in re or shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain
or moisture.
This device is not intended for use in the direct eld of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid
incommoding reexions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct
eld of view.
The equipment is not intended for used at a video workstation in compliance BildscharbV.
The sound pressure level at the operator position is equal or less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 7779.
WARNING:
1. Remove the plug from the mains socket when this unit is not in use for a prolonged period of time.
2. To prevent electric shock, do not remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualied
service personnel.
3. Do not remove the earthing pin on the mains plug. This apparatus is equipped with a three prong
earthingtype mains plug. This plug will only t an earthing-type mains socket. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug into the mains socket, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the
earthing plug.
WARNING:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
CAUTION: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions, which include
using the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or
peripheral device. If you use serial port to connect PC for external control of projector, you must
use a commercial RS-232C serial interface cable with ferrite core. Any unauthorized changes or
modications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate.
This is a device to project images onto a screen, etc., and is not indented for use as indoor lighting in a
domestic environment.
Directive 2009/125/EC
Importers name and address within the European Union
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Panasonic Testing Center
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Product information (for Turkey only)
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
EEE Complies with Directive of Turkey.
ENGLISH - 3
Read this rst!
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG (U.K. only)
FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 13 amp fuse
is tted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating
of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is retted when the fuse is replaced. If you
lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover
can be purchased from an Authorised Service Center.
If the tted moulded plug is unsuitable for the mains socket in your home, then the fuse should be
removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the
cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be tted, please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt, please consult a qualied electrician.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Green - and - Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is coloured GREEN - AND - YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the
plug which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol
or coloured GREEN or GREEN -
AND - YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
13A250V
BS1363/A
HE-8
N
ASA
L
4 - ENGLISH
Read this rst!
WARNING:
r
POWER
The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
when problems occur. If the following problems occur, cut off the power supply immediately.
Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in re or electric shock.
f
If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, cut off the power supply.
f
If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken, cut off the power supply.
f
If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector, cut off the power supply.
Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs, and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself.
During a thunderstorm, do not touch the projector or the cable.
Electric shocks can result.
Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug.
If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or re will result.
f
Do not damage the power cord, make any modications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it
excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.
Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.
Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal.
If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating will result.
f
Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall.
Do not use anything other than the provided power cord.
Failure to observe this will result in re or electric shocks. Please note that if you do not use the provided power
cord to ground the device on the side of the outlet, this may result in electric shocks.
Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust.
Failure to observe this will cause a re.
f
If dust builds up on the power plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation.
Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.
Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks.
Do not overload the wall outlet.
If the power supply is overloaded (ex., by using too many adapters), overheating may occur and re will result.
r
ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause burns, re or damage to the projector.
Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into
contact with oily smoke or steam, ex. a bathroom.
Using the projector under such conditions will result in re, electric shocks or deterioration of components.
Deterioration of components (such as ceiling mount brackets) may cause the projector which is mounted on the
ceiling to fall down.
Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector
or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable.
Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector, and severe injury or damage
could result.
ENGLISH - 5
Read this rst!
WARNING:
Do not cover the air intake/exhaust ports or place anything within 500 mm (20") of them.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause re or damage to the projector.
f
Do not place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places.
f
Do not place the projector on cloth or papers, as these materials could be drawn into the air intake port.
Do not place your hands or other objects close to the air exhaust port.
Doing so will cause burns or damage your hands or other objects.
f
Heated air comes out of the air exhaust port. Do not place your hands or face, or objects which cannot
withstand heat close to this port.
Do not look at the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause loss of sight.
f
Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Do not directly look at this light.
f
Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens. In addition, turn off the power and
disconnect the power plug when you are away from the projector.
Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector.
High voltages can cause re or electric shocks.
f
For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.
Do not project an image with the lens cover attached.
Doing so can cause re.
Do not allow metal objects, ammable objects, or liquids to enter inside of the projector. Do not allow
the projector to get wet.
Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in re, electric shock, or malfunction of the
projector.
f
Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector.
f
If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.
f
Particular attention must be paid to children.
Use the ceiling mount bracket specied by Panasonic.
Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specied one will result in falling accidents.
f
Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down.
Installation work (such as ceiling mount bracket) should only be carried out by a qualied technician.
If installation is not carried out and secured correctly it can cause injury or accidents, such as electric shocks.
f
Do not use anything other than an authorized ceiling mount bracket.
f
Be sure to use the provided accessory wire with an eye bolt as an extra safety measure to prevent the
projector from falling down. (Install in a different location to the ceiling mount bracket.)
6 - ENGLISH
Read this rst!
WARNING:
r
ACCESSORIES
Do not use or handle the batteries improperly, and refer to the following.
Failure to observe this will cause burns, batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch re.
f
Use AAA/R03 batteries.
f
Do not use unspecied batteries.
f
Do not use chargeable batteries.
f
Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.
f
Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or re.
f
Do not allow the + and – terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as
necklaces or hairpins.
f
Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects.
f
Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.
f
Make sure the polarities (+ and –) are correct when inserting the batteries.
f
Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.
f
Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.
If the battery uid leaks, do not touch it with bare hands, and take the following measures if necessary.
f
Battery uid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inammation or injury.
Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
f
Battery uid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight.
In this case, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
Do not disassemble the lamp unit.
If the lamp breaks, it could cause injury.
Lamp replacement
The lamp has high internal pressure. If improperly handled, an explosion and severe injury or accidents will
result.
f
The lamp can easily explode if struck against hard objects or dropped.
f
Before replacing the lamp unit, be sure to turn the power off and to disconnect the power plug from the wall
outlet.
Electric shocks or explosions can result if this is not done.
f
When replacing the lamp unit, turn the power off and allow the lamp to cool for at least one hour before
handling it otherwise it can cause burns.
Do not use the supplied power cord with devices other than this projector.
f
Using the supplied power cord with devices other than this projector may cause short circuits or
overheating, and result in electric shock or re.
Do not allow children to reach the batteries (AAA/R03).
Accidentally swallowing them can cause physical harm.
f
If swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.
Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly.
f
Leaving them in the unit may result in uid leakage, overheating, or explosion of the batteries.
ENGLISH - 7
Read this rst!
CAUTION:
r
POWER
When disconnecting the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug and power connector.
If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and re, short-circuits or serious electric shocks
will result.
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, disconnect the power plug from the wall
outlet.
Failure to do so may result in re or electric shock.
Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before carrying out any cleaning and replacing the unit.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
r
ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or
injury. The projector will be damaged or deformed.
Do not put your weight on this projector.
You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.
f
Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.
Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations.
Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in re.
f
Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near stoves.
Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens.
Failure to observe this could cause injury.
Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.
f
Extremely strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause damage to the object and can cause the set to malfunction.
f
Extremely strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.
Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause re or electric shocks to
occur.
When mounting the projector on the ceiling, keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with
metal parts inside the ceiling.
Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks.
r
ACCESSORIES
Do not use the old lamp unit.
If used it could cause lamp explosion.
If the lamp has broken, ventilate the room immediately. Do not touch or bring your face close to the
broken pieces.
Failure to observe this will cause the user to absorb the gas which was released when the lamp broke and
which contains nearly the same amount of mercury as uorescent lamps, and the broken pieces will cause
injury.
f
If you believe that you have absorbed the gas or that the gas has got into your eyes or mouth, seek medical
advice immediately.
f
Ask your dealer about replacing the lamp unit and check the inside of the projector.
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the remote
control.
Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch re or explode, which may result in re
or contamination of surrounding area.
8 - ENGLISH
Read this rst!
CAUTION:
r
MAINTENANCE
Do not touch the fan with your ngers or any other parts of your body when replacing the lamp unit.
Doing so can cause injury.
Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector once a year.
Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in re.
f
For cleaning fee, ask your dealer.
r
VIEWING 3D VIDEO
Those with a medical history of oversensitivity to light, heart problems, or poor physical health should
not view 3D images.
This may lead to a worsening of medical conditions.
If you feel tiredness or discomfort, or other abnormality while viewing with 3D Eyewear, discontinue
viewing.
Continuing use may cause health problems. Take a break as necessary.
When viewing 3D movies, aim to view one movie at a time and take a break as necessary.
When viewing 3D images, for example when playing 3D games or using a PC where two way interaction
is possible, take an appropriate break every 30 to 60 minutes.
Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.
When preparing contents, use contents properly created to be used for 3D.
This may cause eye fatigue or health problems.
When viewing 3D images, pay attention to people and objects in the vicinity.
3D video may be mistaken for actual objects, and the related bodily movements can cause damage to objects
and lead to injury.
Use 3D Eyewear when viewing 3D videos.
Do not tilt your head when viewing with 3D Eyewear.
Those who are near or far sighted, those with weaker eyesight in one eye, or those with astigmatism
should use corrective glasses etc. when using 3D Eyewear.
If the image appears distinctly double when viewing 3D video, discontinue viewing.
Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.
View at a distance of at least three times the effective height of the screen.
Viewing at distance closer than the recommended distance may cause eye fatigue. As with movies, if there are
black bands at the top and bottom of the video, view at a distance of 3 times or more of the height of the video
section.
Children younger than 5 or 6 years old should not use 3D Eyewear.
As it is difcult to gauge the reactions of children to fatigue and discomfort their condition may worsen suddenly.
If a child uses the 3D Eyewear, guardians should beware of the child’s eyes becoming tired.
ENGLISH - 9
Read this rst!
To remove the battery
Remote Control Battery
1. Press the guide and lift the cover.
(ii)
(i)
2. Remove the batteries.
10 - ENGLISH
rTrademarks
f Windows
®
, Windows Vista
®
, and Internet Explorer
®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
f Mac, Mac OS, OS X, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
f PJLink
TM
is a registered trademark or pending trademark in Japan, the United States, and other countries and regions.
f HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
LLC in the United States and other countries.
f VGA and XGA are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States.
f SVGA is a trademark or registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association.
f RoomView and Crestron RoomView are registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
Crestron Connected and Fusion RV are trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
f Adobe Flash Player is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc. in the United Stated and/or other
countries.
f RealD 3D is a trademark of RealD Inc.
f Some of the fonts used in the on-screen menu are Ricoh bitmap fonts, which are manufactured and sold by Ricoh Company,
Ltd.
f All other names, company names, and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
Please note that the
®
and
TM
symbols are not specied in this manual.
rIllustrations in this manual
f Illustrations of the projector, screen, and other parts may vary from the actual product.
rReference pages
f Reference pages in this manual are indicated as (x page 00).
rTerm
f In this manual, the “Wireless/wired remote control unit” accessory is referred to as “Remote control”.
ENGLISH - 11
Features of the Projector
High luminance, high contrast, and
high color reproduction
With a unique optical system and
advanced lamp drive system, high
luminance of 10 000 lm
*1
and high contrast
of 10 000:1, and high color reproduction
are achieved even with its compact size.
*1 For PT-DX100E
PT-DZ870E and PT-DW830E is 8 500 lm.
Easy and highly exible setup
Easy and highly exible setup is achieved
by compatibility to DIGITAL LINK and Art-
Net, 3D function support, 3G-SDI standard
support
*1
, standard support of geometric
adjustment function
*1
, and a lineup of
various optional lenses.
*1 Only for PT-DZ870E.
Energy conservation achieved
through the ECO function
Environment-friendly projector with the
recommended lamp replacement interval
of 4 000 H
*1
and with a low standby power.
*1 When [LAMP POWER] is set to [ECO]
Quick Steps
For details, refer to the corresponding pages.
1. Set up the projector.
(x page 32)
2. Attach the projection lens.
(x page 47)
3. Connect with external devices.
(x page 49)
4. Connect the power cord.
(x page 54)
5. Switch on the projector.
(x page 55)
6. Make initial settings.
(x page 22)
f Take this step when you switch on the power for the
rst time after purchasing the projector.
7. Select the input signal.
(x page 58)
8. Adjust the image.
(x page 58)
12 - ENGLISH
Contents
Contents
Read this rst! 2
Chapter 1 Preparation
Precautions for use 16
Cautions when transporting
16
Cautions when installing
16
Security
18
DIGITAL LINK
18
Art-Net menu
18
Disposal
18
Cautions on use
19
Accessories
20
Optional accessories
21
Start-up display
22
Focus adjustment
22
Initial setting (display language)
22
Initial setting (installation setting)
23
Initial setting (stand by mode)
23
Initial setting (screen setting)
24
About your projector
25
Remote control
25
Projector body
26
Using the remote control
29
Inserting and removing the batteries
29
Setting the remote control ID numbers
29
Connecting to the projector with a cable
30
Chapter 2 Getting Started
Setting up 32
Installation mode
32
Parts for ceiling mount (optional)
32
Screen size and throw distance
33
Adjusting adjustable feet
46
Removing/attaching the projection lens
47
Removing the projection lens
47
Attaching the projection lens
48
Connecting
49
Before connecting
49
Connecting example: AV equipment
50
Connecting example: Computers
51
Connecting example: Twisted-pair-cable
transmitter
52
Chapter 3 Basic Operations
Switching on/off the projector 54
Connecting the power cord
54
Power indicator
54
Switching on the projector
55
Making adjustments and selections
56
Switching off the projector
57
Direct power off function
57
Projecting
58
Selecting the input signal
58
Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift
58
Moving the lens to the home position
59
Adjustment range by the lens position shift
(optical shift)
59
Operating with the remote control
61
Using the shutter function
61
Using the on-screen display function
61
Switching the input signal
62
Using the status function
62
Using the automatic setup function
63
Using the function button
63
Displaying the internal test pattern
63
Chapter 4 Settings
Menu navigation 65
Navigating through the menu
65
Main menu
66
Sub-menu
67
[PICTURE] menu
71
[PICTURE MODE]
71
[CONTRAST]
71
[BRIGHTNESS]
71
[COLOR]
72
[TINT]
72
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
72
[WHITE GAIN]
74
[GAMMA]
74
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
74
[SHARPNESS]
75
[NOISE REDUCTION]
75
[DYNAMIC IRIS]
75
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
76
sRGB-compliant video
77
Be sure to read “Read this rst!” from page 2.
ENGLISH - 13
Contents
[POSITION] menu
78
[SHIFT]
78
[ASPECT]
78
[ZOOM]
79
[CLOCK PHASE]
80
[GEOMETRY(2D)]
80
[KEYSTONE(3D)]
82
[KEYSTONE]
83
[ADVANCED MENU] menu
84
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]
84
[BLANKING]
84
[INPUT RESOLUTION]
85
[CLAMP POSITION]
85
[EDGE BLENDING]
86
[FRAME RESPONSE]
87
[FRAME LOCK]
88
[RASTER POSITION]
88
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
89
Changing the display language
89
[3D SETTINGS] menu
90
[3D SYSTEM SETTING]
90
[DLP Link]
90
[3D SYNC SETTING]
90
[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]
91
[3D INPUT FORMAT]
91
[3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION]
92
[3D 24Hz IMAGE POSITION]
92
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
92
[SUB CLOCK PHASE]
93
[3D FRAME DELAY]
93
[3D TEST MODE]
93
[3D TEST PATTERN]
93
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE]
94
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS]
94
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
95
[COLOR MATCHING]
95
[COLOR CORRECTION]
96
[SCREEN SETTING]
96
[AUTO SIGNAL]
97
[AUTO SETUP]
97
[RGB IN]
98
[DVI-D IN]
98
[HDMI IN]
99
[DIGITAL LINK IN]
99
[SDI IN]
100
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
101
[CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] (NTSC or 480i
YC
B
C
R
signal input only) 102
[BACK COLOR]
103
[STARTUP LOGO]
103
[UNIFORMITY]
103
[SHUTTER SETTING]
104
[FREEZE]
105
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
105
[CUT OFF]
106
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
108
[PROJECTOR ID]
108
[PROJECTION METHOD]
108
[COOLING CONDITION]
109
[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE]
109
[LAMP SELECT]
109
[LAMP RELAY]
110
[LAMP POWER]
111
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]
111
[STANDBY MODE]
11 6
[SCHEDULE]
116
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]
117
[RS-232C]
118
[STATUS]
119
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
120
[REMOTE2 MODE]
121
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
121
[DATE AND TIME]
121
[LENS CALIBRATION]
122
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]
122
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]
123
[INITIALIZE]
123
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
123
[P IN P] menu
124
Using P IN P function
124
[TEST PATTERN] menu
126
[TEST PATTERN]
126
14 - ENGLISH
Contents
[SIGNAL LIST] menu 127
Registering new signals
127
Renaming the registered signal
127
Deleting the registered signal
127
Protecting the registered signal
128
Expanding signal lock-in range
128
Sub memory
129
[SECURITY] menu
130
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
130
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]
130
[DISPLAY SETTING]
131
[TEXT CHANGE]
131
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
131
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
133
[NETWORK] menu
134
[DIGITAL LINK MODE]
134
[DIGITAL LINK SETUP]
134
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]
135
[NETWORK SETUP]
135
[NETWORK CONTROL]
136
[NETWORK STATUS]
136
[DIGITAL INTERFACE BOX]
136
[Art-Net SETUP]
136
Network connections
137
Connecting to a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
137
Accessing from the web browser
138
Chapter 5 Maintenance
Lamp/temperature/lter indicators 157
When an indicator lights up
157
Maintenance/replacement
159
Before performing maintenance/replacement
159
Maintenance
159
Replacing the unit
160
Troubleshooting
164
Chapter 6 Appendix
Technical information 167
PJLink protocol
167
Using Art-Net function
168
Control commands via LAN
170
<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal
171
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
176
Two-window display combination list
177
Control device password
177
Upgrade Kit
178
List of compatible signals
178
Specications
183
Dimensions
186
Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket
187
Index
188
ENGLISH - 15
Chapter 1 Preparation
This chapter describes things you need to know or check before using the projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
16 - ENGLISH
Precautions for use
Cautions when transporting
f If you purchased the projector with the standard zoom lens, remove the lens cushion before use, and store it for the future
use. When transporting the projector, move the lens position to the home position and attach the lens cushion.
If you purchased the projector with the lens sold separately, remove the lens hole cover before use, and store it for the future
use. When transporting the projector, move the lens position to the home position, remove the projection lens, and then
attach the lens hole cover.
For the steps to move the lens to the home position, refer to “Moving the lens to the home position” (x page 59).
Lens hole cover
Lens cushion
f When transporting the projector, hold it securely by its bottom and avoid excessive vibration and impacts. They may damage
the internal components and result in malfunctions.
f Do not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended. Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.
Cautions when installing
rAfter attachment of the projection lens, be sure to attach the Lens Mount Cover.
Otherwise dust will accumulate inside and may cause malfunctions.
rDo not set up the projector outdoors.
The projector is designed for indoor use only.
rDo not set up the projector in the following locations.
f Places where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may cause damage to internal components
or malfunction.
f Near the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may uctuate in rare cases due
to the heated air from the air exhaust port or the hot or cooled air. Make sure that the exhaust from the projector or other
equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward the front of the projector.
f Places with sharp temperature uctuations such as near lights (studio lamps): Doing so may shorten the life of the lamp, or
result in deformation of the outer case due to heat, which may cause malfunctions.
The operating environment temperature of the projector should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 45 °C (113 °F) when using it at
elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level, and between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F) when using it at high
altitudes (1 400 m (4 593') or higher – lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level).
f Near high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.
f Places where there is high-power laser equipment: Directing a laser beam onto the projection lens surface causes damage
to the DLP chips.
rBe sure to ask a specialized technician or your dealer when installing the projector on
a ceiling.
The optional Ceiling Mount Bracket is required.
Model No.: ET-PKD120H (for high ceilings), ET-PKD120S (for low ceilings), ET-PKD120B (Projector Mount Bracket)
rAsk a qualied technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK
connection.
Image and sound may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 17
rThe projector may not work properly due to strong radio wave from the broadcast
station or the radio.
If there is any facility or equipment, which outputs strong radio wave, near the installation location, install the projector at a
location sufciently far from the source of the radio wave. Or, wrap the LAN cable connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN>
terminal by using a piece of metal foil or a metal pipe, of which is grounded at both ends.
rFocus adjustment
The high clarity projection lens is thermally affected by the light from the light source, making the focus unstable in the period
just after switching on the power. Wait at least 30 minutes with the image projected before adjusting the lens focus.
rMake sure to set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [ON] when using the projector at
elevations between 1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above
sea level.
Failure to do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions.
rMake sure to set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [OFF] when using the projector at
elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level.
Failure to do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions.
rDo not install the projector at elevations of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.
Doing so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions.
rDo not use the projector tilted to the right or left.
Using the projector at a vertical angle that exceeds 15° may reduce product life or result in malfunction.
rCautions when setting up the projector
f When installing the projector at the section other than the oor by using the adjustable feet, use six screw holes for ceiling
mount for xing the projector (as shown in the gure).
(Screw diameter: M6, tapping depth inside the set: 12 mm (15/32"), torque: 4±0.5 N·m)
f Make a clearance of at least 20 mm (25/32") between the projector bottom and the setting surface by inserting spacers
(metallic) between them.
Screw holes for ceiling mount (M6)
Adjustable feet Adjustable feet
The positions of screw holes for ceiling mount and adjustable feet
f Use the adjustable feet only for the oor standing installation and for adjusting the angle. Using them for other purposes may
damage the projector.
f Do not stack projectors on top of each other.
f Do not use the projector supporting it by the top.
f Do not use the projector tilted at an angle that exceeds ±15° from the horizontal plane.
f Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
18 - ENGLISH
f Prevent hot and cool air from the air conditioning system to blow directly to the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the
projector.
+15°
-
15°
500 mm (20") or longer 500 mm (20") or longer 500 mm (20") or longer
100 mm (4") or longer
f Do not install the projector in a conned space.
When it is necessary to install the projector in a conned space, install the air conditioning or ventilation separately. Exhaust
heat may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.
Security
When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents.
f Personal information being leaked via this product
f Unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party
f Interfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party
Take sufcient security measures. (x pages 130, 152)
f Make your password difcult to guess as much as possible.
f Change your password periodically.
f Panasonic Corporation or its afliate companies will never ask for your password directly. Do not divulge your password in
case you receive such inquiries.
f The connecting network must be secured by a rewall, etc.
f Set a password for the web control and restrict the users who can log in.
DIGITAL LINK
“DIGITAL LINK” is a technology that uses a twisted-pair-cable to transmit video, audio, Ethernet, and serial control signals.
The projector supports the optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G), and the “XTP transmitter” of Extron
Electronics. For twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturers of which the operation has been veried with the
DIGITAL LINK compatible projector, refer to Panasonic website (http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/). Note that the verication
for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have
been veried. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective
manufacturers. In addition, audio function is not equipped with the projector. Therefore, audio transmission is not supported.
Art-Net menu
“Art-Net” is an Ethernet communication protocol based on the TCP/IP protocol. By using the DMX controller and the application
software, illumination and stage system can be controlled. Art-Net is made based on DMX512 communication protocol.
Disposal
To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal.
The lamp contains mercury. When disposing of used lamp units, contact your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of
disposal.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 19
Cautions on use
rTo get a good picture quality
In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast, prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or blinds over
windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from shining onto the screen.
rDo not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from ngerprints or anything else, this will be magnied and projected onto
the screen.
Attach the supplied lens cover to the projection lens of the projector or an optional projection lens when you do not use the
projector.
rDLP chips
f The DLP chips are precision-made. Note that in rare cases, pixels of high precision could be missing or always lit. Note that
such phenomena do not indicate malfunction.
f Directing a high-power laser beam onto the projection lens surface can damage the DLP chips.
rDo not move the projector or subject it to vibration or impact while it is operating.
Doing so may shorten the life of the built-in motor.
rLamp
The light source of the projector is a high-pressure mercury lamp.
A high-pressure mercury lamp has the following characteristics.
f The luminance of the lamp will decrease by duration of usage.
f The lamp may burst with a loud sound or have its service life shortened because of shock, chipping, or degradation due to
cumulative runtime.
f The lamp life varies greatly depending on individual differences and usage conditions. In particular, frequent on/off switching
of the power greatly deteriorate the lamp and affects the lamp life.
f Continuous use for over one week will deteriorate the lamp. The degradation of the lamp due to continuous use can be
reduced by using the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [LAMP RELAY].
f In rare cases, the lamps burst shortly after projection starts.
f The risk of bursting increases when the lamp is used beyond its replacement cycle. Make sure to replace the lamp unit
regularly.
(“When to replace the lamp unit” (x page 161), “How to replace the lamp unit” (x page 162))
f If the lamp bursts, gas contained inside of the lamp is released in the form of smoke.
f It is recommended that you store the Replacement lamp unit as a contingency.
rComputer and external device connections
f When connecting a computer or an external device, read this manual carefully regarding the use of power cords and
shielded cables as well.
f Use a commercial cable with a ferrite core for connecting with the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
rViewing 3D images
The projector can display 3D video signals that are input through various systems such as “frame packing” and “side by
side.” In addition, the projector corresponds to DLP Link system 3D eyewear. However, not all the 3D eyewear operations are
warranted.
You are required to prepare external devices for viewing 3D images (such as 3D eyewear, video signal output devices) which
are suitable for your 3D system. For connections of the projector and external devices, they are different depends on the 3D
system to be used, see the operating instructions of external devices you use.
Refer to “List of 3D compatible signals” (x page 180) for the types of 3D video signals that can be used with the projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
20 - ENGLISH
Accessories
Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector. Numbers enclosed in < > show the number of
accessories.
Wireless/wired remote control unit <1>
(N2QAYA000060)
Power cord <1>
(TXFSX01RGRZ)
Power cord <1>
(TXFSX02RGRZ)
Lens Mount Cover <1>
(TKPB62301)
Lens cover <1>
(TKKL5244-1)
(Only models with lens)
CD-ROM <1>
(TXFQB02VLJ1)
AAA/R03 battery <2>
(For remote control unit)
Attention
f After unpacking the projector, discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly.
f Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector.
f For missing accessories, consult your dealer.
f Store small parts in an appropriate manner, and keep them away from small children.
Note
f The model numbers of accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
Contents of the supplied CD-ROM
The contents of the supplied CD-ROM are as follows.
Instruction/list (PDF) Operating Instructions – Functional Manual
Multi Projector Monitoring & Control Software Operating Instructions
Logo Transfer Software Operating Instructions
List of Compatible Projector
Models
This is a list of projectors that are compatible with the software
contained in the CD-ROM and their restrictions.
Software Multi Projector Monitoring &
Control Software (Windows)
This software allows you to monitor and control multiple
projectors connected to the LAN.
Logo Transfer Software
(Windows)
This software allows you to transfer original images, such as
company logos to be displayed when projection starts, to the
projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 21
Optional accessories
Optional accessories
(product name)
Model No.
Projection lens
Zoom lens ET-DLE085, ET-DLE150, ET-DLE250, ET-DLE350, ET-DLE450
Fixed-focus lens ET-DLE055
Ceiling Mount Bracket
ET-PKD120H (for high ceilings), ET-PKD120S (for low ceilings), ET-PKD120B (Projector Mount
Bracket)
Replacement lamp unit ET-LAD120 (1 pc), ET-LAD120W (2 pcs)
Upgrade Kit ET-UK20 (only for PT-DZ870E)
Digital Interface Box ET-YFB100G
Note
f The model numbers of optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
Chapter 1Preparation — Start-up display
22 - ENGLISH
Start-up display
When the projector is switched on for the rst time after purchase as well as when [ALL USER DATA] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[INITIALIZE] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts, then the initial setting screen is displayed. Set them
in accordance with circumstances.
In other occasions, you can change the settings by menu operations.
Focus adjustment
Adjust the focus to display the menu screen clearly.
You may also need to adjust the zoom and shift.
Refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift” (x page 58) for details.
1) Press asqw to adjust the focus.
LENS
FOCUS
ADJUST
2) Press the <MENU> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (display language)
Select the language to show on the screen.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the display language from the [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu.
1) Press as to select the display language.
ENTER
1/4
Please select DISPLAY LANGUAGE
INITIAL SETTING
SELECT
SET
2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Chapter 1Preparation — Start-up display
ENGLISH - 23
Initial setting (installation setting)
Set [PROJECTION METHOD] and [COOLING CONDITION] depending on the installation mode. Refer to “Installation mode” (x page 32)
for details.
Set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [ON] when using the projector at high altitudes between 1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m
(8 858') above sea level.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu.
1) Press as to select an item.
2) Press qw to switch the setting.
2/4
When PROJECTION METHOD is changed, confirm that
COOLING CONDITION is set correctly.
It may shorten the life of the lamp and projector if used
in incorrect setting.
Switch to HIGH ALTITUDE MODE "ON" if over 1400m
(4593Ft).
INITIAL SETTING
SET
CHANGEMENU SELECT
PROJECTION METHOD
COOLING CONDITION
FRONT/FLOOR
AUTO
HIGH ALTITUDE MODE
OFF
ENTER
3) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (stand by mode)
Set the operation mode during the standby. The default setting is [ECO] that keeps power consumption low during standby. When the network
function is used during standby, set to [NORMAL]. After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STANDBY MODE].
1) Press as to select an item.
2) Press qw to switch the setting.
3/4
When set to ECO, network functions and SERIAL OUT
terminal, and some RS-232C commands are not
available during standby.
INITIAL SETTING
SET
CHANGE
STANDBY MODE
ECO
ENTER
3) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Chapter 1Preparation — Start-up display
24 - ENGLISH
Initial setting (screen setting)
Set the screen format (aspect ratio) and display position of the image. After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each
item from the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SCREEN SETTING].
1) Press as to select an item.
2) Press qw to switch the setting.
16:10
4/4
SCREEN POSITION
Set as necessary for the screen in use.
INITIAL SETTING
SET
CHANGEMENU SELECT
SCREEN FORMAT
ENTER
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f Conrm the setting value and complete the initial setting.
Note
f If you press the <MENU> button on the initial setting screen, you can go back to the previous screen.
f To continue operations after completed the initial settings, refer to “Selecting the input signal” (x page 58).
f By default, the time zone of the projector is set to +09:00 (Japan and Korean Standard Time). Change the setting in the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu [DATE AND TIME] [TIME ZONE] to the time zone of the region where you use the projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — About your projector
ENGLISH - 25
About your projector
Remote control
1
3
2
4
5
7
6
8
9
10
15
12
11
13
14
16
17
Front Top
Bottom
1 Power standby <v> button
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is switched
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.
2 Power on <b> button
Starts projection when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the
projector is set to <ON> when the power is switched off
(standby mode).
3 Remote control indicator
Flashes if any button in the remote control is pressed.
4 Lens (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) buttons
Adjusts the projection lens. (x page 58)
5 <MENU> button/<ENTER> button/asqw buttons
Used to navigate through the menu screen. (x page 65)
6 <ON SCREEN> button
Switches on (display)/off (hide) the on-screen display function.
(x page 61)
7 Input selection (<RGB1/2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI-D>,
<VIDEO>, <SDI>, <HDMI>) buttons
Switches the input signal to project. (x page 62)
8 <FUNCTION> button
Assigns a frequently used operation as a shortcut button.
(x page 63)
9 Number (<0> - <9>) buttons
Used when the system uses multiple projectors.
Used to input ID numbers or passwords.
10 <AUTO SETUP> button
Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting
the image.
[PROGRESS] is displayed on the screen while adjusting
automatically. (x page 63)
11 <SHUTTER> button
Used when temporarily turning off the image. (x page 61)
12 <TEST PATTERN> button
Displays the test pattern. (x page 63)
13 <STATUS> button
Displays the projector information.
14 <DEFAULT> button
Resets the content of the sub-menu to the factory default.
(x page 66)
15 <ID SET> button
Sets the ID number of the remote control to use for a system
using multiple projectors. (x page 29)
16 Remote control signal transmitter
17 Remote control wired terminal
Connects to the projector with a cable. (x page 30)
Attention
f Do not drop the remote control.
f Avoid contact with liquids or moisture.
f Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control.
Note
f When operating the remote control by directly pointing the receiver of the projector, operate the remote control at a distance approx. 30 m
(98'5") or shorter from the remote control receiving section. The remote control can control at angles of up to ±30° vertically and horizontally,
but the effective control range may be reduced.
f If there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver, the remote control may not operate properly.
f The signal will be reected off the screen. However, the operating range may be limited from light reection loss due to the screen material.
f If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light, such as uorescent light, the remote control may not operate properly. Use
it in a place distant from the light source.
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will ash if the projector receives a remote control signal.
Chapter 1Preparation — About your projector
26 - ENGLISH
Projector body
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8 9 7
7 7
10 11 1012 13
15
8
17
18
1614
Front Side
Rear
88
8 8 8 8 819
8
Projection direction
Bottom
WARNING
Keep your hands and other objects away from the air
exhaust port.
f Keep your hands and face away.
f Do not insert your ngers.
f Keep heat-sensitive objects away.
Heated air from the air exhaust port can cause burns, injury, or
deformations.
1 Remote control signal receiver (front)
2 Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
Displays the status of the power.
3 Lamp indicator <LAMP1>
Displays the status of lamp 1.
4 Lamp indicator <LAMP2>
Displays the status of lamp 2.
5 Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Displays the internal temperature status.
6 Filter indicator <FILTER>
Displays the status of the air lter case and air lter.
7 Adjustable feet
Adjusts the projection angle.
8 Air intake port
9 Projection lens
(Only models with lens)
10 Air exhaust port
11 Air lter case
12 Remote control signal receiver (rear)
13 Lamp unit cover
14 Control panel (x page 27)
15 Connecting terminals (x page 28)
Chapter 1Preparation — About your projector
ENGLISH - 27
16 Security slot
This security slot is compatible with the Kensington security
cables.
17 <MAIN POWER> switch
Turns on/off the main power.
18 <AC IN> terminal
Connect the supplied power cord.
19 Burglar hook port
Attaches a burglar prevention cable, etc.
Attention
f Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.
r Control panel
10
9
11
13
14
12
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Power standby <v> button
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is switched
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.
2 Power on <b> button
Starts projection when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the
projector is set to <ON> when the power is switched off
(standby mode).
3 <VIDEO> button
Switches the input to VIDEO.
4 <RGB1/RGB2> button
Switches the input to RGB.
5 <DVI-D> button
Switches the input to DVI-D.
6 <HDMI> button
Switches the input to HDMI.
7 <DIGITAL LINK> button
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
8 <SDI> button
Switches the input to SDI.
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
9 <MENU> button
Displays or hides the main menu. (x page 65)
Returns to the previous menu when a sub-menu is displayed.
If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least
three seconds while the on-screen display is off, the on-screen
display is turned on.
10 <LENS> button
Adjusts the focus, zoom, and shift (position) of the lens.
11 <ENTER> button
Determines and executes an item in the menu screen.
12 <SHUTTER> button
Used when temporarily turning off the image. (x page 61)
13 asqw buttons
Use to select items in the menu screen, change settings, and
adjust levels.
Also used to enter a password in [SECURITY] or enter
characters.
14 <AUTO SETUP> button
Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting
the image. [PROGRESS] is displayed on the screen during
automatic adjustment. (x page 63)
Chapter 1Preparation — About your projector
28 - ENGLISH
r Connecting terminals
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal
These are the terminals to connect the remote control for serial
control when the system uses multiple projectors.
2 <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using the
external control circuit.
3 <SERIAL IN> terminal
This is the RS-232C compatible terminal to externally control
the projector by connecting a computer.
4 <SERIAL OUT> terminal
This is a terminal to output the signal connected to the <SERIAL
IN> terminal.
5 <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal / <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal
This is a terminal to input or output control signals when using
the projector in 3D systems.
6 <SDI IN> terminal
This is the terminal to input SDI signals. (Only for PT-DZ870E)
7 <VIDEO IN> terminal
This is the terminal to input video signals.
8 <RGB 1 IN> (<R/P
R
>, <G/Y>, <B/P
B
/C>, <SYNC/HD>, <VD>)
terminal
This is a terminal to input RGB signals or the YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
and
Y/C signals.
9 <RGB 2 IN> terminal
This is a terminal to input RGB signals or YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signals.
10 <DVI-D IN> terminal
This is the terminal to input DVI-D signals.
11 <HDMI IN> terminal
This is the terminal to input HDMI signals.
12 <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal
This is the LAN terminal to connect to the network. This is also
used when connecting a video signal transmission device via
the LAN terminal.
Attention
f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
Chapter 1Preparation — Using the remote control
ENGLISH - 29
Using the remote control
Inserting and removing the batteries
(ii)
(i)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Open the cover. (Fig. 1)
2) Insert the batteries and close the cover (insert the m side first). (Fig. 2)
f When removing the batteries, perform the steps in reverse order.
Setting the remote control ID numbers
When you use the system with multiple projectors, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector individually using single
remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
After setting the ID number of the projector, set same ID number on the remote control.
The factory default ID number of the projector is set to [ALL]. When using a single projector, keep pressing the <ID SET> button on
the remote control for at least three seconds to set the ID number of the remote control to [ALL]. In addition, when the ID number of
the projector is unknown, setting the ID number to [ALL] enables the remote control.
How to set
1) Press the <ID SET> button on the remote control.
2) Within five seconds, press the two-digit ID number set on the projector using the number (<0> - <9>)
buttons.
f When the ID number is set to [ALL], you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the projector.
Attention
f Since the ID number of the remote control can be set without the projector, do not press the <ID SET> button on the remote control
carelessly. If the <ID SET> button is pressed and no number (<0> - <9>) buttons are pressed within ve seconds, the ID number returns to
its original value before the <ID SET> button was pressed.
f The ID number set on the remote control will be stored unless it is set again. However, it will be erased if the remote control is left with dead
batteries. Set the same ID number again when the batteries are replaced.
Note
f When the ID number of the remote control is set to [0], you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the projector, as
same as when [ALL] is set.
f Set the ID number of the projector from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [PROJECTOR ID].
Chapter 1Preparation — Using the remote control
30 - ENGLISH
Connecting to the projector with a cable
When you use the system with multiple projectors, use commercial M3 stereo mini jack cables and connect the other devices to the <REMOTE
1 IN>/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminals of the projector body.
The remote control is effective even in places where an obstacle stands in the light path or where devices are susceptible to outside light.
Connecting terminals
Connecting to a second projector
M3 stereo mini jack cable (commercially available)
Remote control
Connecting to the remote
control wired terminal
Attention
f Use a cable that is 15 m (49'3") or shorter, with 2 core shield. The remote control may not operate when the length of the cable exceeds
15 m (49'3") or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate.
ENGLISH - 31
Chapter 2 Getting Started
This chapter describes things you need to do before using the projector such as the setup and connections.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
32 - ENGLISH
Setting up
Installation mode
There are four ways to set up the projector. Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [PROJECTION METHOD] (x page 108) depending on
the installation location. Set [COOLING CONDITION] to [AUTO]. Using the projector with [COOLING CONDITION] set incorrectly may shorten
the life of the lamp.
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward Setting on a desk/oor and projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Menu item Method Menu item Method
[PROJECTION METHOD] [FRONT/CEILING] [PROJECTION METHOD] [REAR/FLOOR]
[COOLING CONDITION] [AUTO] [COOLING CONDITION] [AUTO]
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Setting on a desk/oor and projecting forward
Menu item Method Menu item Method
[PROJECTION METHOD] [REAR/CEILING] [PROJECTION METHOD] [FRONT/FLOOR]
[COOLING CONDITION] [AUTO] [COOLING CONDITION] [AUTO]
Parts for ceiling mount (optional)
You can install the projector on the ceiling using the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD120H (for high ceilings), ET-PKD120S
(for low ceilings), and ET-PKD120B (Projector Mount Bracket)).
f Be sure to use the Ceiling Mount Bracket specied for this projector.
f Refer to the Installation Instructions supplied with the Ceiling Mount Bracket when installing the projector with the bracket.
Attention
f To ensure projector performance and security, installation of the Ceiling Mount Bracket must be carried out by your dealer or a qualied
technician.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 33
Screen size and throw distance
Refer to the screen size and projection distances to install the projector. Image size and image position can be adjusted in accordance with the
screen size and screen position.
SD
L (LW/LT)
L1
L1
L (LW/LT)
SW SH
H
SH
SW
Projection screen
Screen
Screen
(Unit: m)
L (LW/LT)
*1
Projection distance
L1 Lens protrusion dimension
SH Image height
SW Image width
H Distance from the lens center to the lower edge of the image
SD Image diagonal size
*1 LW: Minimum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
LT: Maximum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
(Unit: m)
Projection lens Model No. L1 dimension (approximate value)
Standard lens 0.043
ET-DLE055 0.028
ET-DLE085 0.084
ET-DLE150 0.045
ET-DLE250 0.045
ET-DLE350 0.051
ET-DLE450 0.095
Attention
f Before setting up, read “Precautions for use” (x page 16).
f Do not use the projector and the high-powered laser equipment in the same room. The DLP chips can be damaged if a laser beam hits the
projection lens surface.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
34 - ENGLISH
[GEOMETRY(2D)] projection range
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from the side) [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from above)
Screen
Screen
Vertical arc correction (viewed from the side) Horizontal arc correction (viewed from above)
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Arc center
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Arc center
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Standard status
Projection
lens Model
No.
Only for [KEYSTONE] [KEYSTONE] and [CURVED] used together Only for [CURVED]
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Min. value of
R2/L2
Min. value of
R3/L3
Min. value of
R2/L2
Min. value of
R3/L3
Standard
zoom lens
±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.9 1.7 0.5 1
ET-DLE055 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.7 4.3 1 2.6
ET-DLE085 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.7 4.3 1 2.6
ET-DLE150 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 1.1 2.6 0.6 1.5
ET-DLE250 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.7 1.3 0.4 0.7
ET-DLE350 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.4 0.8 0.3 0.5
ET-DLE450 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.3 0.6 0.2 0.3
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 35
When using the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20)
Projection
lens Model
No.
Only for [KEYSTONE] [KEYSTONE] and [CURVED] used together Only for [CURVED]
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Min. value of
R2/L2
Min. value of
R3/L3
Min. value of
R2/L2
Min. value of
R3/L3
Standard
zoom lens
±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.7 1.3 0.4 0.7
ET-DLE055 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.3 3.3 0.8 1.9
ET-DLE085 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.3 3.3 0.8 1.9
ET-DLE150 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.9 2 0.5 1.1
ET-DLE250 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.5 1 0.3 0.6
ET-DLE350 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.3 0.6 0.2 0.4
ET-DLE450 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.3
*1 Cannot correct [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] if the total exceeds 55° when used at the same time.
Note
f When [GEOMETRY(2D)] is used, the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases.
f Make the curved screen a circular arc shape with one part of a perfect circle removed.
f Adjustment range of the [GEOMETRY(2D)] items may not match the listed projection range depending on the projection lens. Use this
projector within the projection range, otherwise the correction may not work.
f [GEOMETRY(2D)] can be selected only when a 2D image is displayed. The setting becomes invalid while a 3D image is displayed. When
executing the keystone correction while displaying a 3D image, set with [KEYSTONE(3D)].
However, if [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to [DUAL (LEFT)] or [DUAL (RIGHT)], the keystone correction becomes possible by selecting
[GEOMETRY(2D)] even during the 3D image display.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
36 - ENGLISH
Projection distance of each projection lens
A ±5 % error in listed projection distances may occur.
In addition, when [GEOMETRY(2D)] and [KEYSTONE] are used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specied screen size.
For PT-DZ870E
r When the screen aspect is 16:10
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Standard zoom
lens
Optional lens
Fixed-
focus
lens
Ultra short focus
zoom lens
Short focus zoom
lens
Intermediate focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No.
ET-DLE055
ET-DLE085 ET-DLE150 ET-DLE250
Throw ratio
*1
1.7-2.4:1 0.8:1 0.8-1.0:1 1.3-1.9:1 2.3-3.6:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.673 1.077 1.82 2.57 0.83 0.82 1.04 1.38 2.01 2.42 3.87
1.52 (60") 0.808 1.292 2.20 3.10 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.66 2.43 2.92 4.65
1.78 (70") 0.942 1.508 2.58 3.63 1.18 1.17 1.47 1.95 2.84 3.42 5.44
2.03 (80") 1.077 1.723 2.95 4.16 1.35 1.35 1.68 2.23 3.25 3.92 6.23
2.29 (90") 1.212 1.939 3.33 4.69 1.53 1.52 1.90 2.52 3.66 4.42 7.02
2.54 (100") 1.346 2.154 3.71 5.21 1.70 1.70 2.11 2.81 4.08 4.92 7.81
3.05 (120") 1.615 2.585 4.47 6.27 2.05 2.05 2.55 3.38 4.90 5.91 9.39
3.81 (150") 2.019 3.231 5.60 7.86 2.58 2.57 3.19 4.24 6.14 7.41 11.75
5.08 (200") 2.692 4.308 7.50 10.50 3.45 3.44 4.27 5.67 8.20 9.91 15.70
6.35 (250") 3.365 5.385 9.39 13.14 4.31 5.35 7.10 10.26 12.41 19.64
7.62 (300") 4.039 6.462 11.28 15.79 5.18 6.43 8.53 12.33 14.91 23.59
8.89 (350") 4.712 7.539 13.18 18.43 6.06 7.51 9.96 14.39 17.40 27.53
10.16 (400") 5.385 8.616 15.07 21.07 6.93 8.59 11.39 16.45 19.90 31.48
12.70 (500") 6.731 10.770 18.86 26.36 8.67 10.75 14.25 20.58 24.90 39.37
15.24 (600") 8.077 12.923 22.64 31.65 10.42 12.91 17.11 24.70 29.89 47.25
Lens type
Optional lens
Height position (H)
*2
Long focus zoom
lens
Ultra long focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-DLE350 ET-DLE450 Standard zoom
lens/ET-DLE085/
ET-DLE150/
ET-DLE250/
ET-DLE350/
ET-DLE450
ET-DLE055
(Fixed)
Throw ratio
*1
3.6-5.4:1 5.4-8.6:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.673 1.077 3.80 5.81 5.66 9.12 0 - 0.34 0.34
1.52 (60") 0.808 1.292 4.59 7.00 6.85 11.01 0 - 0.40 0.40
1.78 (70") 0.942 1.508 5.38 8.19 8.04 12.89 0 - 0.47 0.47
2.03 (80") 1.077 1.723 6.16 9.38 9.23 14.78 0 - 0.54 0.54
2.29 (90") 1.212 1.939 6.95 10.57 10.43 16.66 0 - 0.61 0.61
2.54 (100") 1.346 2.154 7.74 11.76 11.62 18.55 0 - 0.67 0.67
3.05 (120") 1.615 2.585 9.31 14.14 14.00 22.31 0 - 0.81 0.81
3.81 (150") 2.019 3.231 11.68 17.71 17.58 27.97 0 - 1.01 1.01
5.08 (200") 2.692 4.308 15.61 23.66 23.54 37.39 0 - 1.35 1.35
6.35 (250") 3.365 5.385 19.55 29.61 29.50 46.81 0 - 1.68
7.62 (300") 4.039 6.462 23.49 35.56 35.46 56.24 0 - 2.02
8.89 (350") 4.712 7.539 27.42 41.51 41.42 65.66 0 - 2.36
10.16 (400") 5.385 8.616 31.36 47.46 47.38 75.08 0 - 2.69
12.70 (500") 6.731 10.770 39.23 59.36 59.30 93.93 0 - 3.37
15.24 (600") 8.077 12.923 47.11 71.25 71.22 112.77 0 - 4.04
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 2.03 m (80") screen size.
*2 When the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible. Therefore, the height position (H) becomes SH/2.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 37
r When the screen aspect is 16:9
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Standard zoom
lens
Optional lens
Fixed-
focus
lens
Ultra short focus
zoom lens
Short focus zoom
lens
Intermediate focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No.
ET-DLE055
ET-DLE085 ET-DLE150 ET-DLE250
Throw ratio
*1
1.7-2.4:1 0.8:1 0.8-1.0:1 1.3-1.9:1 2.3-3.6:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.623 1.107 1.87 2.64 0.85 0.85 1.07 1.42 2.07 2.49 3.97
1.52 (60") 0.747 1.328 2.26 3.19 1.03 1.03 1.29 1.71 2.49 3.00 4.79
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 2.65 3.73 1.21 1.21 1.51 2.00 2.92 3.51 5.60
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 3.04 4.27 1.39 1.39 1.73 2.30 3.34 4.03 6.41
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 3.43 4.82 1.57 1.57 1.95 2.59 3.77 4.54 7.22
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 3.82 5.36 1.75 1.75 2.17 2.89 4.19 5.05 8.03
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 4.60 6.45 2.11 2.10 2.62 3.47 5.04 6.08 9.65
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 5.76 8.08 2.65 2.64 3.28 4.36 6.31 7.62 12.08
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 7.71 10.80 3.55 3.54 4.39 5.82 8.43 10.19 16.14
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 9.65 13.51 4.43 5.50 7.29 10.55 12.75 20.19
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 11.60 16.23 5.33 6.61 8.76 12.67 15.32 24.25
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 13.55 18.95 6.23 7.72 10.23 14.79 17.89 28.30
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 15.49 21.66 7.12 8.83 11.70 16.91 20.46 32.35
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 19.38 27.10 8.91 11.05 14.64 21.15 25.59 40.46
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 23.27 32.53 10.71 13.27 17.58 25.39 30.72 48.57
Lens type
Optional lens
Height position (H)
*2
Long focus zoom
lens
Ultra long focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-DLE350 ET-DLE450 Standard zoom
lens/ET-DLE085/
ET-DLE150/
ET-DLE250/
ET-DLE350/
ET-DLE450
ET-DLE055
(Fixed)
Throw ratio
*1
3.6-5.4:1 5.4-8.6:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.623 1.107 3.91 5.98 5.82 9.39
-
0.06 - 0.31 0.31
1.52 (60") 0.747 1.328 4.72 7.20 7.05 11.32
-
0.07 - 0.37 0.37
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 5.53 8.43 8.27 13.26
-
0.09 - 0.44 0.44
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 6.34 9.65 9.50 15.20
-
0.10 - 0.50 0.50
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 7.15 10.87 10.72 17.13
-
0.11 - 0.56 0.56
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 7.96 12.09 11.95 19.07
-
0.12 - 0.62 0.62
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 9.58 14.54 14.40 22.94
-
0.15 - 0.75 0.75
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 12.00 18.21 18.08 28.75
-
0.19 - 0.93 0.93
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 16.05 24.32 24.20 38.44
-
0.25 - 1.25 1.25
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 20.10 30.44 30.33 48.12
-
0.31 - 1.56
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 24.14 36.55 36.45 57.81
-
0.37 - 1.87
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 28.19 42.67 42.58 67.49
-
0.44 - 2.18
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 32.24 48.78 48.71 77.18
-
0.50 - 2.49
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 40.33 61.01 60.96 96.55
-
0.62 - 3.11
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 48.42 73.24 73.21 115.91
-
0.75 - 3.74
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 2.03 m (80") screen size.
*2 When the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible. The height position (H) becomes SH/2.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
38 - ENGLISH
r When the screen aspect is 4:3
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Standard zoom
lens
Optional lens
Fixed-
focus
lens
Ultra short focus
zoom lens
Short focus zoom
lens
Intermediate focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No.
ET-DLE055
ET-DLE085 ET-DLE150 ET-DLE250
Throw ratio
*1
2.1-2.9:1 0.9:1 0.9-1.2:1 1.6-2.3:1 2.7-4.3:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.762 1.016 2.07 2.92 0.94 0.94 1.18 1.56 2.29 2.75 4.39
1.52 (60") 0.914 1.219 2.50 3.52 1.14 1.14 1.42 1.89 2.75 3.31 5.28
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 2.93 4.12 1.34 1.33 1.67 2.21 3.22 3.88 6.17
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 3.35 4.72 1.54 1.53 1.91 2.54 3.69 4.44 7.07
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 3.78 5.31 1.74 1.73 2.16 2.86 4.15 5.01 7.96
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 4.21 5.91 1.93 1.93 2.40 3.18 4.62 5.57 8.85
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 5.07 7.11 2.33 2.32 2.89 3.83 5.55 6.71 10.64
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 6.35 8.91 2.93 2.91 3.62 4.80 6.96 8.40 13.32
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 8.50 11.90 3.92 3.90 4.84 6.42 9.29 11.23 17.78
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 10.64 14.89 4.89 6.07 8.04 11.63 14.06 22.25
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 12.78 17.88 5.88 7.29 9.66 13.96 16.88 26.71
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 14.93 20.88 6.86 8.51 11.28 16.30 19.71 31.18
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 17.07 23.87 7.85 9.73 12.90 18.63 22.54 35.64
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 21.36 29.85 9.82 12.17 16.13 23.30 28.19 44.58
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 25.64 35.84 11.80 14.62 19.37 27.97 33.85 53.51
Lens type
Optional lens
Height position (H)
*2
Long focus zoom
lens
Ultra long focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-DLE350 ET-DLE450 Standard zoom
lens/ET-DLE085/
ET-DLE150/
ET-DLE250/
ET-DLE350/
ET-DLE450
ET-DLE055
(Fixed)
Throw ratio
*1
4.3-6.5:1 6.5-10.3:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.762 1.016 4.32 6.60 6.45 10.37 0 - 0.38 0.38
1.52 (60") 0.914 1.219 5.21 7.95 7.80 12.50 0 - 0.46 0.46
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 6.10 9.29 9.14 14.63 0 - 0.53 0.53
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 7.00 10.64 10.49 16.77 0 - 0.61 0.61
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 7.89 11.99 11.84 18.90 0 - 0.69 0.69
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 8.78 13.34 13.19 21.03 0 - 0.76 0.76
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 10.56 16.03 15.89 25.30 0 - 0.91 0.91
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 13.24 20.07 19.94 31.70 0 - 1.14 1.14
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 17.69 26.80 26.69 42.37 0 - 1.52 1.52
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 22.15 33.54 33.44 53.04 0 - 1.91
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 26.61 40.27 40.18 63.70 0 - 2.29
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 31.06 47.01 46.93 74.37 0 - 2.67
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 35.52 53.74 53.68 85.04 0 - 3.05
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 44.43 67.21 67.17 106.37 0 - 3.81
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 53.35 80.68 80.67 127.70 0 - 4.57
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 2.03 m (80") screen size.
*2 When the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible. The height position (H) becomes SH/2.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 39
For PT-DW830E
r When the screen aspect is 16:10
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Standard zoom
lens
Optional lens
Fixed-
focus
lens
Ultra short focus
zoom lens
Short focus zoom
lens
Intermediate focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No.
ET-DLE055
ET-DLE085 ET-DLE150 ET-DLE250
Throw ratio
*1
1.8-2.5:1 0.8:1 0.8-1.0:1 1.4-2.0:1 2.4-3.8:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.673 1.077 1.91 2.70 0.87 0.87 1.09 1.45 2.12 2.54 4.06
1.52 (60") 0.808 1.292 2.31 3.26 1.06 1.05 1.32 1.75 2.55 3.07 4.89
1.78 (70") 0.942 1.508 2.71 3.81 1.24 1.23 1.54 2.05 2.98 3.59 5.72
2.03 (80") 1.077 1.723 3.11 4.37 1.42 1.42 1.77 2.35 3.42 4.12 6.55
2.29 (90") 1.212 1.939 3.50 4.92 1.61 1.60 2.00 2.65 3.85 4.64 7.38
2.54 (100") 1.346 2.154 3.90 5.48 1.79 1.78 2.22 2.95 4.28 5.16 8.20
3.05 (120") 1.615 2.585 4.70 6.59 2.16 2.15 2.68 3.55 5.15 6.21 9.86
3.81 (150") 2.019 3.231 5.89 8.25 2.71 2.70 3.36 4.45 6.45 7.79 12.35
5.08 (200") 2.692 4.308 7.88 11.03 3.63 3.61 4.49 5.95 8.61 10.41 16.49
6.35 (250") 3.365 5.385 9.86 13.81 4.53 5.62 7.45 10.78 13.03 20.63
7.62 (300") 4.039 6.462 11.85 16.58 5.45 6.76 8.95 12.95 15.65 24.77
8.89 (350") 4.712 7.539 13.84 19.36 6.36 7.89 10.46 15.11 18.28 28.91
10.16 (400") 5.385 8.616 15.83 22.13 7.28 9.02 11.96 17.28 20.90 33.05
12.70 (500") 6.731 10.770 19.80 27.68 9.11 11.29 14.96 21.61 26.14 41.34
15.24 (600") 8.077 12.923 23.78 33.23 10.94 13.55 17.96 25.94 31.39 49.62
Lens type
Optional lens
Height position (H)
*2
Long focus zoom
lens
Ultra long focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-DLE350 ET-DLE450 Standard zoom
lens/ET-DLE085/
ET-DLE150/
ET-DLE250/
ET-DLE350/
ET-DLE450
ET-DLE055
(Fixed)
Throw ratio
*1
3.8-5.7:1 5.6-9.0:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.673 1.077 4.00 6.11 5.96 9.59
-
0.07 - 0.34 0.34
1.52 (60") 0.808 1.292 4.83 7.36 7.21 11.57
-
0.08 - 0.40 0.40
1.78 (70") 0.942 1.508 5.65 8.61 8.46 13.55
-
0.09 - 0.47 0.47
2.03 (80") 1.077 1.723 6.48 9.86 9.71 15.53
-
0.11 - 0.54 0.54
2.29 (90") 1.212 1.939 7.31 11.11 10.96 17.51
-
0.12 - 0.61 0.61
2.54 (100") 1.346 2.154 8.13 12.36 12.21 19.49
-
0.13 - 0.67 0.67
3.05 (120") 1.615 2.585 9.79 14.86 14.72 23.45
-
0.16 - 0.81 0.81
3.81 (150") 2.019 3.231 12.27 18.61 18.47 29.38
-
0.20 - 1.01 1.01
5.08 (200") 2.692 4.308 16.40 24.85 24.73 39.28
-
0.27 - 1.35 1.35
6.35 (250") 3.365 5.385 20.53 31.10 30.99 49.17
-
0.34 - 1.68
7.62 (300") 4.039 6.462 24.67 37.34 37.25 59.06
-
0.40 - 2.02
8.89 (350") 4.712 7.539 28.80 43.59 43.51 68.96
-
0.47 - 2.36
10.16 (400") 5.385 8.616 32.94 49.84 49.76 78.85
-
0.54 - 2.69
12.70 (500") 6.731 10.770 41.20 62.33 62.28 98.64
-
0.67 - 3.37
15.24 (600") 8.077 12.923 49.47 74.82 74.80 118.42
-
0.81 - 4.04
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 2.03 m (80") screen size.
*2 When the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible. The height position (H) becomes SH/2.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
40 - ENGLISH
r When the screen aspect is 16:9
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Standard zoom
lens
Optional lens
Fixed-
focus
lens
Ultra short focus
zoom lens
Short focus zoom
lens
Intermediate focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No.
ET-DLE055
ET-DLE085 ET-DLE150 ET-DLE250
Throw ratio
*1
1.8-2.5:1 0.8:1 0.8-1.0:1 1.4-2.0:1 2.4-3.8:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.623 1.107 1.97 2.78 0.90 0.89 1.12 1.49 2.18 2.62 4.18
1.52 (60") 0.747 1.328 2.38 3.35 1.09 1.08 1.35 1.80 2.62 3.15 5.03
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 2.79 3.92 1.27 1.27 1.59 2.11 3.07 3.69 5.88
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 3.19 4.49 1.46 1.46 1.82 2.42 3.51 4.23 6.73
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 3.60 5.06 1.65 1.65 2.05 2.72 3.96 4.77 7.58
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 4.01 5.63 1.84 1.83 2.29 3.03 4.40 5.31 8.43
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 4.83 6.77 2.22 2.21 2.75 3.65 5.29 6.39 10.14
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 6.05 8.49 2.79 2.78 3.45 4.58 6.63 8.01 12.69
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 8.10 11.34 3.73 3.72 4.61 6.12 8.86 10.70 16.95
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 10.14 14.19 4.66 5.78 7.66 11.08 13.40 21.21
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 12.18 17.04 5.60 6.94 9.21 13.31 16.09 25.46
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 14.23 19.90 6.54 8.11 10.75 15.53 18.79 29.72
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 16.27 22.75 7.48 9.27 12.29 17.76 21.48 33.98
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 20.35 28.45 9.36 11.60 15.38 22.21 26.87 42.49
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 24.44 34.16 11.24 13.93 18.46 26.66 32.26 51.00
Lens type
Optional lens
Height position (H)
*2
Long focus zoom
lens
Ultra long focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-DLE350 ET-DLE450 Standard zoom
lens/ET-DLE085/
ET-DLE150/
ET-DLE250/
ET-DLE350/
ET-DLE450
ET-DLE055
(Fixed)
Throw ratio
*1
3.8-5.7:1 5.6-9.0:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.623 1.107 4.11 6.29 6.13 9.87
-
0.14 - 0.31 0.31
1.52 (60") 0.747 1.328 4.96 7.57 7.42 11.90
-
0.16 - 0.37 0.37
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 5.81 8.85 8.70 13.94
-
0.19 - 0.44 0.44
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 6.66 10.14 9.99 15.97
-
0.22 - 0.50 0.50
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 7.51 11.42 11.28 18.00
-
0.25 - 0.56 0.56
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 8.36 12.71 12.56 20.04
-
0.27 - 0.62 0.62
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 10.06 15.27 15.14 24.11
-
0.33 - 0.75 0.75
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 12.61 19.13 18.99 30.21
-
0.41 - 0.93 0.93
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 16.86 25.55 25.43 40.38
-
0.55 - 1.25 1.25
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 21.11 31.97 31.86 50.54
-
0.68 - 1.56
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 25.36 38.39 38.29 60.71
-
0.82 - 1.87
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 29.61 44.81 44.72 70.88
-
0.96 - 2.18
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 33.86 51.23 51.16 81.05
-
1.10 - 2.49
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 42.35 64.07 64.02 101.39
-
1.37 - 3.11
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 50.85 76.91 76.88 121.73
-
1.64 - 3.74
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 2.03 m (80") screen size.
*2 When the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible. The height position (H) becomes SH/2.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 41
r When the screen aspect is 4:3
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Standard zoom
lens
Optional lens
Fixed-
focus
lens
Ultra short focus
zoom lens
Short focus zoom
lens
Intermediate focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No.
ET-DLE055
ET-DLE085 ET-DLE150 ET-DLE250
Throw ratio
*1
2.2-3.0:1 1.0:1 1.0-1.2:1 1.6-2.4:1 2.9-4.6:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.762 1.016 2.18 3.07 0.99 0.99 1.24 1.65 2.40 2.89 4.61
1.52 (60") 0.914 1.219 2.63 3.70 1.20 1.20 1.50 1.99 2.89 3.48 5.55
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 3.08 4.33 1.41 1.40 1.75 2.33 3.38 4.08 6.48
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 3.53 4.95 1.62 1.61 2.01 2.67 3.87 4.67 7.42
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 3.98 5.58 1.82 1.82 2.26 3.00 4.36 5.26 8.36
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 4.42 6.21 2.03 2.03 2.52 3.34 4.85 5.86 9.30
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 5.32 7.47 2.45 2.44 3.03 4.02 5.83 7.04 11.17
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 6.67 9.35 3.07 3.06 3.80 5.04 7.31 8.82 13.98
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 8.92 12.49 4.11 4.10 5.09 6.74 9.76 11.79 18.67
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 11.17 15.64 5.13 6.37 8.44 12.21 14.76 23.36
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 13.42 18.78 6.17 7.65 10.14 14.66 17.73 28.05
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 15.67 21.92 7.21 8.93 11.84 17.11 20.70 32.74
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 17.92 25.06 8.24 10.22 13.54 19.56 23.67 37.42
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 22.42 31.34 10.31 12.78 16.94 24.47 29.60 46.80
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 26.92 37.63 12.39 15.35 20.34 29.37 35.54 56.17
Lens type
Optional lens
Height position (H)
*2
Long focus zoom
lens
Ultra long focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-DLE350 ET-DLE450 Standard zoom
lens/ET-DLE085/
ET-DLE150/
ET-DLE250/
ET-DLE350/
ET-DLE450
ET-DLE055
(Fixed)
Throw ratio
*1
4.5-6.9:1 6.8-10.8:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.762 1.016 4.54 6.94 6.78 10.90
-
0.08 - 0.38 0.38
1.52 (60") 0.914 1.219 5.48 8.35 8.20 13.14
-
0.09 - 0.46 0.46
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 6.42 9.76 9.61 15.38
-
0.11 - 0.53 0.53
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 7.35 11.18 11.03 17.62
-
0.12 - 0.61 0.61
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 8.29 12.59 12.45 19.86
-
0.14 - 0.69 0.69
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 9.22 14.01 13.87 22.10
-
0.15 - 0.76 0.76
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 11.09 16.83 16.70 26.58
-
0.18 - 0.91 0.91
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 13.90 21.08 20.95 33.30
-
0.23 - 1.14 1.14
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 18.58 28.15 28.03 44.49
-
0.30 - 1.52 1.52
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 23.26 35.22 35.12 55.69
-
0.38 - 1.91
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 27.94 42.29 42.20 66.89
-
0.46 - 2.29
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 32.62 49.36 49.28 78.09
-
0.53 - 2.67
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 37.30 56.43 56.37 89.29
-
0.61 - 3.05
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 46.65 70.57 70.53 111.68
-
0.76 - 3.81
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 56.01 84.71 84.70 134.08
-
0.91 - 4.57
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 2.03 m (80") screen size.
*2 When the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible. The height position (H) becomes SH/2.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
42 - ENGLISH
For PT-DX100E
r When the screen aspect is 4:3
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Standard zoom
lens
Optional lens
Fixed-
focus
lens
Ultra short focus
zoom lens
Short focus zoom
lens
Intermediate focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No.
ET-DLE055
ET-DLE085 ET-DLE150 ET-DLE250
Throw ratio
*1
1.8-2.5:1 0.8:1 0.8-1.0:1 1.3-2.0:1 2.4-3.7:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.762 1.016 1.78 2.51 0.81 0.81 1.01 1.34 1.97 2.36 3.78
1.52 (60") 0.914 1.219 2.15 3.03 0.98 0.98 1.22 1.62 2.37 2.85 4.55
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 2.52 3.55 1.15 1.15 1.43 1.90 2.77 3.34 5.32
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 2.89 4.06 1.32 1.32 1.64 2.18 3.18 3.83 6.09
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 3.26 4.58 1.49 1.49 1.85 2.46 3.58 4.31 6.86
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 3.63 5.10 1.66 1.66 2.07 2.74 3.98 4.80 7.63
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 4.37 6.13 2.01 2.00 2.49 3.30 4.79 5.78 9.17
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 5.48 7.68 2.52 2.51 3.12 4.14 6.00 7.24 11.49
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 7.33 10.26 3.38 3.36 4.18 5.54 8.02 9.69 15.34
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 9.18 12.85 4.21 5.23 6.94 10.03 12.13 19.20
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 11.03 15.43 5.07 6.29 8.33 12.05 14.57 23.06
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 12.88 18.02 5.92 7.34 9.73 14.07 17.01 26.91
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 14.73 20.60 6.77 8.40 11.13 16.08 19.45 30.77
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 18.43 25.77 8.48 10.51 13.92 20.12 24.33 38.48
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 22.13 30.94 10.18 12.62 16.72 24.15 29.22 46.19
Lens type
Optional lens
Height position (H)
*2
Long focus zoom
lens
Ultra long focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-DLE350 ET-DLE450 Standard
zoom lens/
ET-DLE150/
ET-DLE250/
ET-DLE350/
ET-DLE450
ET-DLE085
ET-DLE055
(Fixed)
Throw ratio
*1
3.7-5.6:1 5.5-8.9:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.762 1.016 3.71 5.68 5.52 8.91 0 - 0.38 0.04 - 0.38 0.38
1.52 (60") 0.914 1.219 4.48 6.84 6.69 10.75 0 - 0.46 0.05 - 0.46 0.46
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 5.25 8.01 7.86 12.60 0 - 0.53 0.05 - 0.53 0.53
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 6.02 9.17 9.02 14.44 0 - 0.61 0.06 - 0.61 0.61
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 6.79 10.33 10.19 16.28 0 - 0.69 0.07 - 0.69 0.69
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 7.56 11.50 11.35 18.12 0 - 0.76 0.08 - 0.76 0.76
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 9.10 13.82 13.68 21.81 0 - 0.91 0.09 - 0.91 0.91
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 11.41 17.31 17.18 27.33 0 - 1.14 0.11 - 1.14 1.14
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 15.26 23.13 23.00 36.54 0 - 1.52 0.15 - 1.52 1.52
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 19.11 28.94 28.83 45.75 0 - 1.91 0.19 - 1.91
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 22.96 34.76 34.66 54.97 0 - 2.29 0.23 - 2.29
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 26.80 40.57 40.48 64.18 0 - 2.67 0.27 - 2.67
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 30.65 46.39 46.31 73.39 0 - 3.05 0.30 - 3.05
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 38.35 58.02 57.96 91.81 0 - 3.81 0.38 - 3.81
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 46.05 69.65 69.61 110.23 0 - 4.57 0.46 - 4.57
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 2.03 m (80") screen size.
*2 When the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible. The height position (H) becomes SH/2.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 43
r When the screen aspect is 16:9
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Standard zoom
lens
Optional lens
Fixed-
focus
lens
Ultra short focus
zoom lens
Short focus zoom
lens
Intermediate focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No.
ET-DLE055
ET-DLE085 ET-DLE150 ET-DLE250
Throw ratio
*1
1.8-2.5:1 0.8:1 0.8-1.0:1 1.3-2.0:1 2.4-3.8:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.623 1.107 1.94 2.74 0.88 0.88 1.11 1.47 2.15 2.58 4.12
1.52 (60") 0.747 1.328 2.34 3.31 1.07 1.07 1.34 1.77 2.59 3.11 4.96
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 2.75 3.87 1.26 1.25 1.57 2.08 3.03 3.64 5.80
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 3.15 4.43 1.44 1.44 1.79 2.38 3.47 4.18 6.64
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 3.55 4.99 1.63 1.62 2.02 2.69 3.90 4.71 7.48
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 3.96 5.56 1.82 1.81 2.25 2.99 4.34 5.24 8.32
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 4.76 6.68 2.19 2.18 2.71 3.60 5.22 6.30 10.00
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 5.97 8.37 2.75 2.74 3.40 4.51 6.54 7.90 12.52
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 7.99 11.19 3.68 3.67 4.55 6.04 8.74 10.56 16.72
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 10.01 14.00 4.60 5.70 7.56 10.93 13.22 20.93
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 12.02 16.82 5.52 6.85 9.08 13.13 15.88 25.13
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 14.04 19.63 6.45 8.00 10.61 15.33 18.54 29.33
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 16.05 22.45 7.38 9.15 12.13 17.53 21.20 33.53
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 20.09 28.08 9.24 11.45 15.17 21.92 26.52 41.93
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 24.12 33.71 11.10 13.75 18.22 26.31 31.84 50.33
Lens type
Optional lens
Height position (H)
*2
Long focus zoom
lens
Ultra long focus
zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-DLE350 ET-DLE450 Standard
zoom lens/
ET-DLE150/
ET-DLE250/
ET-DLE350/
ET-DLE450
ET-DLE085
ET-DLE055
(Fixed)
Throw ratio
*1
3.7-5.6:1 5.6-8.9:1
Projection screen size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.27 (50") 0.623 1.107 4.06 6.20 6.05 9.74
-
0.21 - 0.31
-
0.16 - 0.31 0.31
1.52 (60") 0.747 1.328 4.90 7.47 7.32 11.74
-
0.25 - 0.37
-
0.19 - 0.37 0.37
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 5.73 8.74 8.58 13.75
-
0.29 - 0.44
-
0.23 - 0.44 0.44
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 6.57 10.00 9.85 15.76
-
0.33 - 0.50
-
0.26 - 0.50 0.50
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 7.41 11.27 11.12 17.76
-
0.37 - 0.56
-
0.29 - 0.56 0.56
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 8.25 12.54 12.39 19.77
-
0.41 - 0.62
-
0.32 - 0.62 0.62
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 9.93 15.07 14.93 23.78
-
0.49 - 0.75
-
0.39 - 0.75 0.75
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 12.44 18.87 18.74 29.81
-
0.62 - 0.93
-
0.49 - 0.93 0.93
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 16.64 25.21 25.09 39.84
-
0.82 - 1.25
-
0.65 - 1.25 1.25
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 20.83 31.54 31.44 49.88
-
1.03 - 1.56
-
0.81 - 1.56
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 25.02 37.88 37.78 59.91
-
1.23 - 1.87
-
0.97 - 1.87
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 29.22 44.22 44.13 69.95
-
1.44 - 2.18
-
1.13 - 2.18
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 33.41 50.55 50.48 79.98
-
1.64 - 2.49
-
1.30 - 2.49
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 41.79 63.22 63.17 100.05
-
2.05 - 3.11
-
1.62 - 3.11
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 50.18 75.89 75.87 120.12
-
2.47 - 3.74
-
1.94 - 3.74
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 2.03 m (80") screen size.
*2 When the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible. The height position (H) becomes SH/2.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
44 - ENGLISH
Formula to calculate projection distance per projection lens
To use a screen size not listed in this manual, check the screen size SD (m) and use the respective formula to calculate projection distance.
The unit of all the formulae is m. (Values obtained by the following calculation formulae contain a slight error.)
For PT-DZ870E
Lens type
Projection lens Model
No.
Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
Standard zoom lens
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 1.4906 x SD
-
0.0746
Max. (LT) L = 2.0814 x SD
-
0.0725
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.5320 x SD
-
0.0746
Max. (LT) L = 2.1393 x SD
-
0.0725
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.6874 x SD
-
0.0746
Max. (LT) L = 2.3563 x SD
-
0.0725
Fixed-focus lens ET-DLE055
16:10 L = 0.6893 x SD
-
0.0476
16:9 L = 0.7084 x SD
-
0.0476
4:3 L = 0.7803 x SD
-
0.0476
Ultra short focus zoom lens ET-DLE085
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 0.6865 x SD
-
0.0471
Max. (LT) L = 0.8498 x SD
-
0.0442
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 0.7056 x SD
-
0.0471
Max. (LT) L = 0.8735 x SD
-
0.0442
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 0.7772 x SD
-
0.0471
Max. (LT) L = 0.9621 x SD
-
0.0442
Short focus zoom lens ET-DLE150
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 1.1259 x SD
-
0.0540
Max. (LT) L = 1.6243 x SD
-
0.0498
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.1572 x SD
-
0.0540
Max. (LT) L = 1.6695 x SD
-
0.0498
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.2747 x SD
-
0.0540
Max. (LT) L = 1.8388 x SD
-
0.0498
Intermediate focus zoom lens ET-DLE250
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 1.9665 x SD
-
0.0800
Max. (LT) L = 3.1059 x SD
-
0.0792
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 2.0212 x SD
-
0.0800
Max. (LT) L = 3.1923 x SD
-
0.0792
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 2.2263 x SD
-
0.0800
Max. (LT) L = 3.5161 x SD
-
0.0792
Long focus zoom lens ET-DLE350
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 3.1000 x SD
-
0.1351
Max. (LT) L = 4.6843 x SD
-
0.1346
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 3.1862 x SD
-
0.1351
Max. (LT) L = 4.8146 x SD
-
0.1346
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 3.5094 x SD
-
0.1351
Max. (LT) L = 5.3030 x SD
-
0.1346
Ultra long focus zoom lens ET-DLE450
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 4.6931 x SD
-
0.3017
Max. (LT) L = 7.4193 x SD
-
0.2991
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 4.8236 x SD
-
0.3017
Max. (LT) L = 7.6256 x SD
-
0.2991
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 5.3129 x SD
-
0.3017
Max. (LT) L = 8.3992 x SD
-
0.2991
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 45
For PT-DW830E
Lens type
Projection lens Model
No.
Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
Standard zoom lens
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 1.5651 x SD
-
0.0746
Max. (LT) L = 2.1855 x SD
-
0.0725
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.6086 x SD
-
0.0746
Max. (LT) L = 2.2462 x SD
-
0.0725
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.7715 x SD
-
0.0746
Max. (LT) L = 2.4736 x SD
-
0.0725
Fixed-focus lens ET-DLE055
16:10 L = 0.7237 x SD
-
0.0476
16:9 L = 0.7438 x SD
-
0.0476
4:3 L = 0.8191 x SD
-
0.0476
Ultra short focus zoom lens ET-DLE085
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 0.7209 x SD
-
0.0471
Max. (LT) L = 0.8923 x SD
-
0.0442
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 0.7409 x SD
-
0.0471
Max. (LT) L = 0.9171 x SD
-
0.0442
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 0.8159 x SD
-
0.0471
Max. (LT) L = 1.0100 x SD
-
0.0442
Short focus zoom lens ET-DLE150
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 1.1822 x SD
-
0.0540
Max. (LT) L = 1.7055 x SD
-
0.0498
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.2151 x SD
-
0.0540
Max. (LT) L = 1.7529 x SD
-
0.0498
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.3381 x SD
-
0.0540
Max. (LT) L = 1.9304 x SD
-
0.0498
Intermediate focus zoom lens ET-DLE250
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 2.0649 x SD
-
0.0800
Max. (LT) L = 3.2612 x SD
-
0.0792
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 2.1223 x SD
-
0.0800
Max. (LT) L = 3.3519 x SD
-
0.0792
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 2.3371 x SD
-
0.0800
Max. (LT) L = 3.6912 x SD
-
0.0792
Long focus zoom lens ET-DLE350
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 3.2550 x SD
-
0.1351
Max. (LT) L = 4.9185 x SD
-
0.1346
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 3.3455 x SD
-
0.1351
Max. (LT) L = 5.0553 x SD
-
0.1346
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 3.6842 x SD
-
0.1351
Max. (LT) L = 5.5671 x SD
-
0.1346
Ultra long focus zoom lens ET-DLE450
16:10
Min. (LW) L = 4.9277 x SD
-
0.3017
Max. (LT) L = 7.7903 x SD
-
0.2991
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 5.0647 x SD
-
0.3017
Max. (LT) L = 8.0069 x SD
-
0.2991
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 5.5775 x SD
-
0.3017
Max. (LT) L = 8.8174 x SD
-
0.2991
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
46 - ENGLISH
For PT-DX100E
Lens type
Projection lens Model
No.
Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
Standard zoom lens
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.4571 x SD
-
0.0746
Max. (LT) L = 2.0346 x SD
-
0.0725
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.5875 x SD
-
0.0746
Max. (LT) L = 2.2167 x SD
-
0.0725
Fixed-focus lens ET-DLE055
4:3 L = 0.6738 x SD
-
0.0476
16:9 L = 0.7340 x SD
-
0.0476
Ultra short focus zoom lens ET-DLE085
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 0.6711 x SD
-
0.0471
Max. (LT) L = 0.8307 x SD
-
0.0442
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 0.7311 x SD
-
0.0471
Max. (LT) L = 0.9051 x SD
-
0.0442
Short focus zoom lens ET-DLE150
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.1006 x SD
-
0.0540
Max. (LT) L = 1.5878 x SD
-
0.0498
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.1991 x SD
-
0.0540
Max. (LT) L = 1.7299 x SD
-
0.0498
Intermediate focus zoom lens ET-DLE250
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.9224 x SD
-
0.0800
Max. (LT) L = 3.0361 x SD
-
0.0792
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 2.0943 x SD
-
0.0800
Max. (LT) L = 3.3078 x SD
-
0.0792
Long focus zoom lens ET-DLE350
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 3.0304 x SD
-
0.1351
Max. (LT) L = 4.5791 x SD
-
0.1346
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 3.3015 x SD
-
0.1351
Max. (LT) L = 4.9888 x SD
-
0.1346
Ultra long focus zoom lens ET-DLE450
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 4.5876 x SD
-
0.3017
Max. (LT) L = 7.2526 x SD
-
0.2991
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 4.9981 x SD
-
0.3017
Max. (LT) L = 7.9015 x SD
-
0.2991
Adjusting adjustable feet
Install the projector on a at surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the projection screen is rectangular.
If the screen is tilted downward, the projection screen can be adjusted to be rectangular by adjusting the front adjustable feet. The adjustable
feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in the horizontal direction.
Extend the adjustable feet by rotating in the direction shown in the gure and retract by rotating in the opposite direction.
Adjustable amount
Each adjustable feet: Approx. 30 mm (1-3/16")
Attention
f Heated air is expelled from the air exhaust port while the lamp is lit. Do not touch the air exhaust port directly when adjusting the adjustable
feet. (x page 26)
Chapter 2Getting Started — Removing/attaching the projection lens
ENGLISH - 47
Removing/attaching the projection lens
Attaching and removing method of the projection lens are same for both standard zoom lenses and optional accessories.
Move the projection lens to the home position before replacing or removing the projection lens. (x page 59)
Attention
f Replace the projection lens after turning off the power of the projector.
f Do not touch the lens signal receiver. Dust or dirt may cause defective contact.
f Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
f Before attaching the projection lens, remove the lens cover attached to the projection lens.
f In case of the ultra short focus zoom lens (Model No.: ET-DLE085), attachment/removal procedures of the Lens Mount Cover are different.
Refer to the user manual supplied with ET-DLE085 for details.
Removing the projection lens
Remove the projection lens using the following procedure.
(ii)
(i)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Fig. 1
Lens Mount Cover
Projection lens
Lens release button
Fig. 2
1) Turn the Lens Mount Cover counterclockwise and remove. (Fig. 1)
2) While keep pressing the lens release button, turn the projection lens counterclockwise to the end and
remove. (Fig. 2)
Attention
f Store the removed projection lens where it will be free from vibration and impact.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Removing/attaching the projection lens
48 - ENGLISH
Attaching the projection lens
Attach the projection lens using the following procedure.
(ii)
(i)
Guide groove
Guide
Projection lens
Fig. 1
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Lens Mount Cover
1) Remove the Lens Mount Cover, and align the projection lens guide to the guide groove of the
projector and insert to the end. (Fig. 1)
2) Turn the projection lens clockwise until it clicks. (Fig. 2)
3) Attach the Lens Mount Cover. (Fig. 3)
f Align the Lens Mount Cover and the projector at dotted line positions in the gure to attach, and turn the Lens Mount Cover clockwise
and x to the projector.
Attention
f Turn the projection lens counterclockwise to conrm that it does not come out.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Connecting
ENGLISH - 49
Connecting
Before connecting
f Before connecting, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected.
f Turn off the power of all devices before connecting cables.
f Take note of the following points before connecting the cables. Failure to do so may result in malfunctions.
g When connecting a cable to a device connected to the projector or the projector itself, touch any nearby metallic objects to eliminate static
electricity from your body before performing work.
g Do not use unnecessarily long cables to connect to a device connected to the projector or to the projector body. The longer the cable, the
more it is susceptible to noise. Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an antenna, it is more susceptible to noise.
g When connecting cables, connect GND rst, then insert the connecting terminal of the connecting device in a straight manner.
f Acquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is neither supplied with the device nor available
as an option.
f If video signals from video equipment contain too much jitter, the images on the screen may wobble. In this case, a time base corrector
(TBC) must be connected.
f The projector accepts video signals (including Y/C signals), analog RGB signals (synchronous signals are TTL level), and digital signals.
f Some computer models are not compatible with the projector.
f Use a cable compensator when you connect devices to the projector using long cables. Otherwise the image may not display properly.
f Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 178) for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector.
<RGB 2 IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
Outside view Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
(10)
(6)
(11) (15)
(1) (5)
(1) R/P
R
(9)
(2) G/Y (10) GND
(3) B/P
B
(11) GND
(4) (12) DDC data
(5) GND (13) SYNC/HD
(6) GND (14) VD
(7) GND (15) DDC clock
(8) GND
<HDMI IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
Outside view Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
Even-numbered pins of (2) to (18)
(1) (19)
(2) (18)
Odd-numbered pins of (1) to (19)
(1) T.M.D.S data 2+ (11) T.M.D.S clock shield
(2) T.M.D.S data 2 shield (12) T.M.D.S clock
-
(3) T.M.D.S data 2
-
(13) CEC
(4) T.M.D.S data 1+ (14)
(5) T.M.D.S data 1 shield (15) SCL
(6) T.M.D.S data 1
-
(16) SDA
(7) T.M.D.S data 0+ (17)
DDC/CEC
GND
(8) T.M.D.S data 0 shield (18) +5 V
(9) T.M.D.S data 0
-
(19) Hot plug detection
(10) T.M.D.S clock+
Chapter 2Getting Started — Connecting
50 - ENGLISH
<DVI-D IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
Outside view Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
(17)(24)
(16)
(9)
(1)(8)
(1) T.M.D.S data 2
-
(13)
(2) T.M.D.S data 2+ (14) +5 V
(3) T.M.D.S data 2/4 shield (15) GND
(4) (16) Hot plug detection
(5) (17) T.M.D.S data 0
-
(6) DDC clock (18) T.M.D.S data 0+
(7) DDC data (19) T.M.D.S data 0/5 shield
(8) (20)
(9) T.M.D.S data 1
-
(21)
(10) T.M.D.S clock1+ (22) T.M.D.S clock shield
(11) T.M.D.S data 1/3 shield (23) T.M.D.S clock+
(12) (24) T.M.D.S clock
-
Connecting example: AV equipment
For <HDMI IN>/<DVI-D IN>/<VIDEO IN> terminals
Blu-ray disc playerVCR (with built-in TBC) DVD player with HDMI terminal (HDCP)
Attention
f Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.
g A VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC)
g A time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR
f If nonstandard burst signals are connected, the image may be distorted. In such case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between the
projector and the external devices.
Note
f When entering DVI-D, some external devices to be connected may require switching the setting using the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[DVI-D IN] [EDID].
f The <DVI-D IN> terminal can be connected to HDMI- or DVI-D-compliant devices. However, images may not appear or may not be
displayed properly on some devices.
f For an HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to HDMI standards
is used, images may be interrupted or may not be displayed.
f The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device with a DVI-D terminal by using an HDMI/DVI conversion
cable, but some devices may not project the image properly or function properly.
f The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).
Chapter 2Getting Started — Connecting
ENGLISH - 51
For <SDI IN> terminal
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
SD-SDI signal, HD-SDI signal or 3G-SDI
signal
Digital VCR for commercial use
Note
f Use the [PICTURE] menu [SYSTEM SELECTOR] to switch the input format.
f Some external devices to be connected require the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SDI IN] to be set.
f Use a 5CFB or higher (such as 5CFB, or 7CFB) or a Belden 1694A or higher connection cable to properly transmit images. Use a
connection cable of 100 m (328'1") length or less.
f When an unsteady signal is connected, an error in signal detection may occur. In such a case, use the [PICTURE] menu [SYSTEM
SELECTOR] to switch to a system that matches the signal format.
Connecting example: Computers
Control computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Control computer
Attention
f When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device, use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially
available shielded cables.
f Use a commercial cable with a ferrite core for connecting with the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
Note
f When entering DVI-D, some external devices to be connected may require switching the setting using the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[DVI-D IN] [EDID].
f For an HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to HDMI standards
is used, images may be interrupted or may not be displayed.
f The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device with a DVI-D terminal by using an HDMI/DVI conversion
cable, but some devices may not project the image properly or function properly.
f The <DVI-D IN> terminal supports single links only.
f When entering the SYNC ON GREEN signal, do not enter sync signals to the <SYNC/HD> terminal or the <VD> terminal.
f If you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset the resume feature to operate
the projector.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Connecting
52 - ENGLISH
Connecting example: Twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Twisted-pair-cable transmitters such as the optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G) use twisted-pair-cables to transmit input
images, Ethernet, and serial control signals, and the projector can input those digital signals to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
Blu-ray disc player
HDMI cable
(commercially available)
Control computer
Projector connecting terminals
Example of twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Computer
Computer cable
(commercially available)
VCR
Hub
(with built-in TBC)
Attention
f Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.
g A VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC)
g A time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR
f If nonstandard burst signals are connected, the image may be distorted. In such case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between the
projector and the external devices.
f Use a commercial HDMI/DVI conversion cable with a ferrite core.
f Ask a qualied technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring for a twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector. Image may be
disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.
f For the LAN cable between a twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
g Compatible with CAT5e or higher
g Shielded type (including connectors)
g Straight-through
g Single wire
f When laying cables between a twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, check that cable characteristics are compatible with CAT5e
or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When using a relay connector midway, include it in the measurement.
f Do not use a hub between a twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
f When connecting to the projector using a twisted-pair-cable transmitter (receiver) of other manufacturer, do not place another twisted-pair-
cable transmitter (receiver) between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturer and the projector. This may cause image to be
disrupted.
f Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
f To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
f Lay the cables between a twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
f When installing multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
f After laying the cables, conrm that the value of [SIGNAL QUALITY] in the [NETWORK] menu [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] is displayed in
green (indicates normal quality). (x page 135)
Note
f For an HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to HDMI standards
is used, image may be interrupted or may not be displayed.
f The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).
f The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1"). If this distance is
exceeded, image may be disrupted and may cause a malfunction in LAN communication. Please note that we do not support the use of the
projector outside the maximum transmission distance.
f For twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturers of which the operation has been veried with the DIGITAL LINK compatible
projector, refer to Panasonic website (http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/). Note that the verication for devices of other manufacturers
has been made for the items set by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been veried. For operation or performance
problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
ENGLISH - 53
Chapter 3 Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic operations to start with.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
54 - ENGLISH
Switching on/off the projector
Connecting the power cord
Make sure that the supplied power cord is securely xed to the projector body to prevent it from being removed easily.
Conrm that the <MAIN POWER> switch is on the <OFF> side before connecting the power cord.
For details of power cord handling, refer to “Read this rst!” (x page 2).
Attaching the power cord
1) Check the shapes of the <AC IN> terminal on the side of the projector body and the power cord
connector and insert the plug completely in the correct direction (until you hear the side tabs click in
place).
Removing the power cord
1) Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch on the side of the projector body is on the <OFF> side, and
remove the power plug from the outlet.
2) Remove the power cord connector from the <AC IN> terminal of the projector body while pressing the
side tabs.
Power indicator
Displays the status of the power. Check the <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> status of the power indicator before operating the projector.
Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
Indicator status Projector status
Off The main power is switched off.
Red Lit
The power is switched off (in standby mode).
Projection will start when the power on <b> button is pressed.
f The projector may not operate when the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2> or
temperature indicator <TEMP> are ashing. (x page 157)
Green Lit Projecting.
Orange Lit
The projector is preparing to switch off the projector.
The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby mode.)
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
ENGLISH - 55
Note
f While the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is lit in orange, the fan is running to cool the projector.
f For about 75 seconds after the projector is switched off and the luminous lamp cooling is started, the lamp indicators do not light up even if
the power is switched on. After the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in red, turn on the power again.
f The projector consumes power even in standby mode (power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lit in red). Refer to “Power consumption”
(x page 183) for the power consumption.
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will ash if the projector receives a remote control signal.
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will ash slowly in green while the shutter is closed.
f If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is ashing in red, consult your dealer.
Switching on the projector
When using the optional projection lens, attach the projection lens before switching on the projector.
Remove the lens cover rst.
2)
4)
4)
3)
1)
1) Connect the power cord to the projector body.
2) Connect the power plug to an outlet.
f (AC 120 V - 240 V 50 Hz/60 Hz)
3) Press the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn on the power.
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will light in red, and the projector will enter the standby mode.
4) Press the power on <b> button.
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in green and the image is soon projected on the screen.
Note
f If the projector is switched on at around 0 °C (32 °F), a warm-up period of approximately ve minutes may be necessary until an image is
displayed.
The temperature indicator <TEMP> lights during the warm-up period. When the warm-up is completed, the temperature indicator <TEMP>
turns off and the projection starts. Refer to “When an indicator lights up” (x page 157) for the indicator status.
f If the operating environment temperature is low and warm-up takes more than ve minutes, the projector will judge that a problem has
occurred and the power will automatically be set to standby mode. If this happens, increase the operating environment temperature to 0 °C
(32 °F) or higher, turn off the main power, and then switch on the projector again.
f If the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], it may take approx. 10 seconds longer before the projector starts
projecting after the power is turned on, compared with when [NORMAL] is set.
f If the <MAIN POWER> switch was set to <OFF> during projection to end the projection using the direct power off function last time, and the
<MAIN POWER> switch is set to <ON> with the power plug connected to the outlet, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will light in
green and the image will soon be projected on the screen.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
56 - ENGLISH
Making adjustments and selections
It is recommended that images are projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
6)
1) 8)
5)
3)
7) 9)
3)
2)
4)
1) 5) 7) 8) 9)2)
6)
1) Press the <FOCUS> button to roughly adjust the focus of the image. (x page 58)
2) Change the setting of [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the
installation mode. (x page 32)
f Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
3) Press the input selection (<RGB1/RGB2> or <RGB1/2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>, <SDI>,
<HDMI>) button to select the input signal.
(SDI input is only for PT-DZ870E)
4) Adjust the front, back and sideway tilt of the projector with the adjustable feet. (x page 46)
5) Press the <SHIFT> button to adjust the position of the image.
6) If the input signal is an RGB signal, press the <AUTO SETUP> button.
7) Press the <ZOOM> button to adjust the size of the image to match the screen.
8) Press the <FOCUS> button again to adjust the focus.
9) Press the <ZOOM> button again to adjust the zoom and the size of the image to match the screen.
Note
f When the projector is switched on for the rst time after purchase as well as when [ALL USER DATA] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[INITIALIZE] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts, then the initial setting screen is displayed. Refer to
“Start-up display” (x page 22) for details.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
ENGLISH - 57
Switching off the projector
1)
2)
1)
4)
3)
2)
1) Press the power standby <v> button.
f The [POWER OFF(STANDBY)] conrmation screen is displayed.
2) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
(Or press the power standby <v> button again.)
f Projection of the image will stop, and the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the projector body lights in orange. (The fan
keeps running.)
3) Wait until the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the projector body lights in red (and the fan
stops) for 170 seconds.
4) Press the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn off the power.
Note
f Do not switch on the projector and project images immediately after switching off the projector.
Turning on the power while the lamp is still hot may shorten the lamp life.
f For about 75 seconds after the projector is switched off and the luminous lamp cooling is started, the lamp indicators will not light up even
if the power is switched on. Even after 75 seconds, the lamp may not light up if the projector is switched on. In such a case, after the power
indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in red, switch on the projector again.
f The projector consumes power even when the power standby <v> button is pressed and the projector is switched off if the main
power of the projector is on.
When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], use of some functions is restricted, but the power
consumption during standby can be conserved.
Direct power off function
Even if the main power <MAIN POWER> switch is turned <OFF> during projection or immediately after turning off the luminous lamp, the
fan runs using internally stored power to cool the luminous lamp. When the projector is mounted on the ceiling or installed in an environment
where the main power <MAIN POWER> switch of the projector cannot be easily turned <OFF>, the power can be turned off directly using the
circuit breaker. It is also safe in case a power outage occurs or the power cord is pulled out immediately after the projector is switched off.
Note
f If the projector was turned off by turning off the circuit breaker directly during projection last time, then the power indicator <ON (G)/
STANDBY (R)> will light in green a while after the circuit breaker is turned on, and then projection of the image will start.
f If cooled with the direct power off function, projection may take a longer time than usual to start when the projector is switched on the next
time.
f Make sure that the fan is not running when packing the projector for transportation or storage.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Projecting
58 - ENGLISH
Projecting
Check the projection lens attachment (x page 48), external device connection (x page 49), power cord connection (x page 54),
switch on the power (x page 55) to start projecting. Select the video for projection, and adjust appearance of the projected image.
Selecting the input signal
Select an input signal.
1) Press the input selection (<RGB1/RGB2> or <RGB1/2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>, <SDI>,
<HDMI>) buttons on the remote control or the control panel.
f The image of the signal being input in the selected terminal is projected.
Attention
f Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back.
Set the [PICTURE] menu [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
f Conrm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the [POSITION] menu
[ASPECT].
Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift
If the projected image or the position is not correct when the positioning of the projector and the screen is correctly installed, adjust the focus,
zoom, and shift.
Using the control panel
1) Press the <LENS> button on the control panel.
f Pressing the button changes the adjustment screen in the order of [FOCUS], [ZOOM], and [SHIFT].
2) Select each item and press asqw to adjust it.
Using the remote control
1) Press the lens (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) buttons on the remote control.
f <FOCUS> button: Adjusts focus.
f <ZOOM> button: Adjusts zoom.
f <SHIFT> button: Adjusts shift.
2) Select each item and press asqw to adjust it.
Caution
During the lens shift operation, do not insert your hand in any opening around the lens.
Your hand may be caught and result in injuries.
Note
f When the projection lens without the zoom function is attached, the zoom adjustment screen will be displayed. However, operation is not
possible.
f Use the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) with the lens position set to the home position. (x page 59)
f The adjustment can be performed quickly by pressing and holding asqw for at least three seconds.
f It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
f Only [FOCUS] is shown in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when the projector is not focused and
displayed characters are unreadable. (Factory default)
The display color of [FOCUS] depends on the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] [OSD DESIGN].
f When the projector is switched off during the shift adjustment, lens calibration needs to be performed the next time the projector is switched
on. (x page 122)
f When the main power is switched off during shift adjustment, a lens calibration error screen will be displayed during the next shift
adjustment. Execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [LENS CALIBRATION].
f When the lens calibration error is displayed even though [LENS CALIBRATION] was executed, ask your dealer to repair the unit.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Projecting
ENGLISH - 59
Moving the lens to the home position
To move the lens to the home position, perform the following procedure.
1) While the [SHIFT] adjustment screen is displayed, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote
control.
f The [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed.
LENS
HOME POSITION
EXECUTE
CANCEL
MENU
ENTER
2) While the [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed (for approximately five seconds), press the <ENTER>
button.
f [PROGRESS] is displayed in the [HOME POSITION] screen, and the lens returns to the home position.
Note
f The home position of the lens is the lens position when the lens is being replaced or when the projector is being stored, and it is not the
optical center of the screen.
f You can also display the [HOME POSITION] screen by pressing the <LENS> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button on the
remote control for at least three seconds.
Adjustment range by the lens position shift (optical shift)
Perform the lens position shift within the adjustment range.
The focus may change when the lens position is shifted out of the adjustment range. This is because the movement of the lens is restricted
to protect the optical parts. Projection position can be adjusted with the optical axis shift based on the standard projection position in the
respective range.
Lens type
Zoom lens
Standard zoom lens, ET-DLE150, ET-DLE250,
ET-DLE350, ET-DLE450
ET-DLE085
PT-DZ870E
Standard projection position
Projection screen height V
Projection screen width H
0.5 V
0.1 H 0.1 H
Standard projection position
Projection screen height V
Projection screen width H
0.1 H 0.1 H
0.5 V
0.4 V
PT-DW830E
Standard projection position
Projection screen height V
Projection screen width H
0.1 H 0.1 H
0.6 V
Standard projection position
Projection screen height V
Projection screen width H
0.1 H 0.1 H
0.6 V
0.5 V
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Projecting
60 - ENGLISH
Lens type
Zoom lens
Standard zoom lens, ET-DLE150, ET-DLE250,
ET-DLE350, ET-DLE450
ET-DLE085
PT-DX100E
Standard projection position
Projection screen height V
Projection screen width H
0.1 H 0.1 H
0.5 V
Standard projection position
Projection screen height V
Projection screen width H
0.45 V
0.34 V
0.1 H 0.1 H
Note
f When the optional xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the shift adjustment is not available.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
ENGLISH - 61
Operating with the remote control
Using the shutter function
If the projector is not used for a certain period of time during the meeting intermission, for example, it is possible to turn off the image
temporarily.
button
1) Press the <SHUTTER> button.
f The image disappears.
f This operation can be also performed using the <SHUTTER> button on the control panel.
2) Press the <SHUTTER> button again.
f The image is displayed.
Note
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will ash slowly in green while the shutter is closed .
f You can set the speed of shutter opening/closing via the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SHUTTER SETTING].
Using the on-screen display function
Turn off the on-screen display function (no display) when you do not wish the viewers to see the on-screen display, such as the menu or the
input terminal name.
button
1) Press the <ON SCREEN> button.
f The on-screen display disappears.
2) Press the <ON SCREEN> button again.
f The on-screen display appears.
Note
f If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden), the on-screen
display is turned on.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
62 - ENGLISH
Switching the input signal
The input for projection can be switched.
button
1) Press the input selection (<RGB1/2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>, <SDI>, <HDMI>) buttons.
f This operation can be also performed using the buttons on the control panel.
<RGB1/2>
Switches the input to RGB1 or RGB2. Switches to another input when one input has already been
chosen.
<DIGITAL LINK> Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
<DVI-D> Switches the input to DVI-D.
<VIDEO> Switch the input to VIDEO.
<SDI>
*1
Switches the input to SDI.
<HDMI> Switch the input to HDMI.
*1 Only for PT-DZ870E
Note
f When the optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal, the ET-YFB100G
input changes with each press of the <DIGITAL LINK> button. The ET-YFB100G input does not change when 3D signals are input from
ET-YFB100G. In such a case, either change the input signal from 3D to 2D or change the input using the button on ET-YFB100G. The input
can also be changed using the control command of RS-232C.
For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers, switch the input on the projector to DIGITAL LINK, and then switch the input on
the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
Using the status function
You can display the status of the projector.
button
1) Press the <STATUS> button.
f The [STATUS] screen is displayed.
RGB2
SXGA60+-A1
65.22kHz/ 59.99Hz
1h
11h/ ON/
1h/ ON/
31°C/ 87°F
27°C/ 80°F
31°C/ 87°F
1/5
SEND STATUS VIA E-MAIL
CHANGE EXIT
STATUS
INPUT
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL FREQUENCY
PROJECTOR RUNTIME
LAMP1
LAMP2
INTAKE AIR TEMP.
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.
AROUND LAMP TEMP.
ENTER
MENU
Note
f This can be displayed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STATUS] (x page 119).
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
ENGLISH - 63
Using the automatic setup function
The automatic setup function can be used to automatically adjust the resolution, clock phase, and image position when analog RGB signals
consisting of bitmap images such as computer signals are being input, or to automatically adjust the image position when DVI-D/HDMI signals
are input. Supplying images with bright white borders at the edges and high-contrast black and white characters is recommended when the
system is in automatic adjustment mode.
Avoid supplying images that include halftones or gradation, such as photographs and computer graphics.
button
1) Press the <AUTO SETUP> button.
f [COMPLETE] is displayed when it has completed without any problem.
f This operation can be also performed using the <AUTO SETUP> button on the control panel.
Note
f The clock phase may shift even if it has completed without any incident. In such cases, adjust the [POSITION] menu [CLOCK PHASE]
(x page 80).
f If an image with blurred edges or a dark image is input, [INCOMPLETE] may appear or adjustment may not be performed properly even
when [COMPLETE] appears. In this case, adjust the settings in the [ADVANCED MENU] menu [INPUT RESOLUTION] (x page 85),
[POSITION] [CLOCK PHASE] (x page 80), and [SHIFT] (x page 78).
f Adjust special signals according to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [AUTO SETUP] (x page 97).
f Automatic adjustment may not work depending on the model of the computer.
f Automatic adjustment may not work for a synchronization signal of C-SY or SYNC ON GREEN.
f Images may be disrupted for a few seconds during automatic adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.
f Adjustment is required for each input signal.
f Automatic adjustment can be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button during the automatic adjustment operation.
f If the automatic setup function is used while moving images are being input, the adjustment may not be performed properly even for an RGB
signal that can use automatic setup. [INCOMPLETE] may appear, or adjustment may not be nished properly even if [COMPLETE] appears.
Using the function button
[P IN P], [SUB MEMORY], [SYSTEM SELECTOR], [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW], [FREEZE], [WAVEFORM MONITOR], [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP],
or [ASPECT] operations can be assigned to the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control so that it can be used as an easy shortcut button.
button
1) Press the <FUNCTION> button.
Note
f Assignment of the function is performed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [FUNCTION BUTTON] (x page 121).
Displaying the internal test pattern
The projector has eight types of internal test patterns to check the condition of the set. To display test patterns, perform the following steps.
button
1) Press the <TEST PATTERN> button.
2) Press qw to select the test pattern.
Note
f Setting is also available from the [TEST PATTERN] (x page 126) menu.
f Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input signal before performing
various adjustments.
64 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings
This chapter describes the settings and adjustments you can make using the on-screen menu.
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
ENGLISH - 65
Menu navigation
The on-screen menu (Menu) is used to perform various settings and adjustments of the projector.
Navigating through the menu
Operating procedure
button
1) Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.
f The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
3D SETTINGS
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
P IN P
ENTER
2) Press as to select an item from the main menu.
f The selected item is highlighted in yellow.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
3D SETTINGS
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
P IN P
ENTER
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The sub-menu items of the selected main menu are displayed.
0
POSITION
SHIFT
ASPECT
ZOOM
KEYSTONE(3D)
CLOCK PHASE
GEOMETRY(2D)
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
DEFAULT
OFF
ENTER
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
66 - ENGLISH
4) Press as to select a sub-menu, and press qw or the <ENTER> button to change or adjust settings.
f Some items will switch in order as follows each time you press qw.
A B C
f For some items, press qw to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below.
0
CONTRAST
ADJUST
Note
f Pressing the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.
f Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector. The menu items that cannot be adjusted or
used are shown in black characters, and they cannot be selected. [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] and [FRAME LOCK] may not be displayed
depending on the input signal.
f Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input.
f Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately ve seconds.
f For menu items, refer to “Main menu” (x page 66) and “Sub-menu” (x page 67).
f The cursor color depends on the settings of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] [OSD DESIGN]. The selected
item is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default.
Resetting adjustment values to the factory default
If the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the values adjusted in the menu items are restored to the factory default settings.
button
1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
0
CONTRAST
ADJUST
Note
f You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time.
f To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu item to the factory default one at a time, execute [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[INITIALIZE] (x page 123).
f Some items cannot be reset to the factory defaults by pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control. Adjust each item manually.
f The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting. The position of the triangular
mark varies according to the selected input signals.
Current adjustment value
Factory default setting
Main menu
The following items are in the main menu.
When a main menu item is selected, the screen changes to a sub-menu selection screen.
Main menu item Page
[PICTURE] 71
[POSITION] 78
[ADVANCED MENU] 84
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] 89
[3D SETTINGS] 90
[DISPLAY OPTION] 95
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
ENGLISH - 67
Main menu item Page
[PROJECTOR SETUP] 108
[P IN P] 124
[TEST PATTERN] 126
[SIGNAL LIST] 127
[SECURITY] 130
[NETWORK] 134
Sub-menu
The sub-menu of the selected main menu item is displayed, and you can set and adjust items in the sub-menu.
[PICTURE]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[PICTURE MODE] [STANDARD]
*1
71
[CONTRAST] [0] 71
[BRIGHTNESS] [0] 71
[COLOR] [0] 72
[TINT] [0] 72
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] [DEFAULT] 72
[WHITE GAIN] [+10] 74
[GAMMA] [DEFAULT] 74
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] [OFF] 74
[SHARPNESS] [+6] 75
[NOISE REDUCTION] [OFF] 75
[DYNAMIC IRIS] [2] 75
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] [YP
B
P
R
]
*1
76
*1 Depends on the signal input.
Note
f The factory default settings may vary depending on the picture mode.
[POSITION]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[SHIFT] 78
[ASPECT] [DEFAULT]
*1
78
[ZOOM] 79
[CLOCK PHASE] [0]
*1
80
[GEOMETRY(2D)]
*2
[OFF] 80
[KEYSTONE(3D)]
*2
82
[KEYSTONE]
*3
83
*1 Depends on the signal input.
*2 Only for PT-DZ870E
*3 Only for PT-DW830E, PT-DX100E
[ADVANCED MENU]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] [AUTO]
*1
84
[BLANKING] 84
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
68 - ENGLISH
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[INPUT RESOLUTION] 85
[CLAMP POSITION] [24]
*1
85
[EDGE BLENDING] [OFF] 86
[FRAME RESPONSE] [NORMAL] 87
[FRAME LOCK] [OFF] 88
[RASTER POSITION] 88
*1 Depends on the signal input.
Note
f Sub-menu items and factory default settings vary depending on the selected input terminal.
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]
Details (x page 89)
[3D SETTINGS]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[3D SYSTEM SETTING] [SINGLE] 90
[DLP Link] [ON] 90
[3D SYNC SETTING] 90
[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING] 91
[3D INPUT FORMAT] [AUTO]
*1
91
[3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION]
*2
[144fps] 92
[3D 24Hz IMAGE POSITION]
*2
[0] 92
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] [NORMAL] 92
[SUB CLOCK PHASE] [0]
*1
93
[3D FRAME DELAY] [0us] 93
[3D TEST MODE] [NORMAL] 93
[3D TEST PATTERN] 93
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE] [ON] 94
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS] 94
*1 Varies depending on the selected input terminal.
*2 Only for PT-DZ870E
[DISPLAY OPTION]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[COLOR MATCHING] [OFF] 95
[COLOR CORRECTION] [OFF] 96
[SCREEN SETTING] 96
[AUTO SIGNAL] [OFF] 97
[AUTO SETUP] 97
[RGB IN] 98
[DVI-D IN] 98
[HDMI IN] 99
[DIGITAL LINK IN] 99
[SDI IN]
*1
100
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] 101
[CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] 102
[BACK COLOR] [BLUE] 103
[STARTUP LOGO] [DEFAULT LOGO] 103
[UNIFORMITY] 103
[SHUTTER SETTING] 104
[FREEZE] 105
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] [OFF] 105
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
ENGLISH - 69
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[CUT OFF] 106
*1 Only for PT-DZ870E
[PROJECTOR SETUP]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[PROJECTOR ID] [ALL] 108
[PROJECTION METHOD] [FRONT/FLOOR] 108
[COOLING CONDITION] [AUTO] 109
[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] [OFF] 109
[LAMP SELECT] [DUAL] 109
[LAMP RELAY] [OFF] 110
[LAMP POWER] [NORMAL] 111
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] 111
[STANDBY MODE] [ECO] 116
[SCHEDULE] [OFF] 116
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT] [LAST USED] 117
[RS-232C] 118
[STATUS] 119
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] [DISABLE] 120
[REMOTE2 MODE] [DEFAULT] 121
[FUNCTION BUTTON] 121
[DATE AND TIME] 121
[LENS CALIBRATION] 122
[SAVE ALL USER DATA] 122
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] 123
[INITIALIZE] 123
[SERVICE PASSWORD] 123
[P IN P]
Details (x page 124)
[TEST PATTERN]
Details (x page 126)
[SIGNAL LIST]
Details (x page 127)
[SECURITY]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[SECURITY PASSWORD] [OFF] 130
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] 130
[DISPLAY SETTING] [OFF] 131
[TEXT CHANGE] 131
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] 131
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] 133
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
70 - ENGLISH
[NETWORK]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[DIGITAL LINK MODE] [AUTO] 134
[DIGITAL LINK SETUP] 134
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS] 135
[NETWORK SETUP] 135
[NETWORK CONTROL] 136
[NETWORK STATUS] 136
[DIGITAL INTERFACE BOX] 136
[Art-Net SETUP] 136
Note
f Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector.
The menu items that cannot be adjusted or used are shown in black characters, and they cannot be selected.
f Sub-menu items and factory default settings vary depending on the selected input terminal.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 71
[PICTURE] menu
On the menu screen, select [PICTURE] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f After selecting the item, press asqw to adjust.
[PICTURE MODE]
You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable for the image source and the environment in which the projector is used.
1) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[STANDARD] The image becomes suitable for moving images in general.
[CINEMA] The image becomes suitable for movie contents.
[NATURAL] The image is sRGB compliant.
[REC709]
*1
The image becomes Rec.709 compliant.
[DICOM SIM.] The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard.
[DYNAMIC] The light output is maximized for use in bright areas.
[GRAPHIC] The image becomes suitable for input from the personal computer.
*1 Use the factory default setting for the settings other than [PICTURE MODE].
Note
f The factory default picture mode is [GRAPHIC] for still image input signals and [STANDARD] for movie-based input signals.
f Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709” and is a color standard of high-denition television.
f DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the
DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images.
[CONTRAST]
You can adjust the contrast of the colors.
1) Press as to select [CONTRAST].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press the w button.
The screen becomes brighter.
-
31 - +31
Press the q button.
The screen becomes darker.
Attention
f Adjust [BRIGHTNESS] rst when you need to adjust the black level.
[BRIGHTNESS]
You can adjust the dark (black) part of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
72 - ENGLISH
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press the w button.
Increases the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
-
31 - +31
Press the q button.
Reduces the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
[COLOR]
You can adjust the color saturation of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [COLOR].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press the w button.
Deepens colors.
-
31 - +31
Press the q button.
Weakens colors.
[TINT]
You can adjust the skin tone in the projected image.
1) Press as to select [TINT].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [TINT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press the w button.
Adjusts skin tone toward greenish color.
-
31 - +31
Press the q button.
Adjusts skin tone toward reddish purple.
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
You can switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish.
Adjusting with color temperature
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Factory default setting.
[USER1]
Adjusts white balance as desired. Refer to “Adjusting desired white balance” (x page 73) for
details.
[USER2]
[3200K] - [9300K] Allows you to set in increments of 100 K. Select so that images become natural.
Note
f When [PICTURE MODE] (x page 71) is set to [DICOM SIM.], [DEFAULT] cannot be selected.
f When [COLOR MATCHING] (x page 95) adjustment is set to other than [OFF], [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is xed to [USER1].
f The color temperature numerical values are guidelines.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 73
Adjusting desired white balance
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].
8) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the [WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.
9) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
10) Press qw to adjust the level.
Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
[RED]
Press the w button.
Deepens red.
[WHITE BALANCE HIGH]: 0 - +255 (factory default is
+255)
[WHITE BALANCE LOW]:
-
127 - +127 (factory default is
0)
Press the q button.
Weakens red.
[GREEN]
Press the w button.
Deepens green.
Press the q button.
Weakens green.
[BLUE]
Press the w button.
Deepens blue.
Press the q button.
Weakens blue.
Note
f Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the
factory default setting.
Adjusting desired white balance based on existing color temperature settings
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select a setting other than [DEFAULT], [USER1], or [USER2].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CHANGE TO *****] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [USER1] or [USER2].
f The status of the color temperature changed is saved to the selected item.
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
7) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [USER1] or [USER2] data is overwritten.
f If you press qw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the data will not be overwritten.
f The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen is displayed.
8) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
9) Press qw to adjust the level.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
74 - ENGLISH
Note
f Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the
factory default setting.
f When color temperature has been changed, the colors before and after the change will differ slightly.
Changing the name of [USER1] or [USER2]
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
8) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The name set to color temperature is changed.
Note
f When a name is changed, display of [USER1], [USER2] is also changed.
[WHITE GAIN]
Adjusts the brightness of the white part of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [WHITE GAIN].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [WHITE GAIN] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press w.
Brightness of the white part gets stronger.
0 - +10
Press q.
The image becomes more natural.
[GAMMA]
You can switch gamma mode.
1) Press as to select [GAMMA].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Factory default setting.
[1.8]
Set so that images become as you like.[2.0]
[2.2]
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
You can correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 75
1) Press as to select [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] No correction.
[1] Corrects the image to weaken vividness.
[2] Corrects the image to medium vividness.
[3] Corrects the image to high vividness.
[SHARPNESS]
You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [SHARPNESS].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press the w button.
Contours become sharper.
0 - +15
Press the q button.
Contours become softer.
Note
f If you press w while the adjustment value is [+15], the value will become [0]. If you press q while the adjustment value is [0], the value will
become [+15].
[NOISE REDUCTION]
You can reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal.
1) Press as to select [NOISE REDUCTION].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [NOISE REDUCTION] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] No correction.
[1] Slightly corrects the noise.
[2] Moderately corrects the noise.
[3] Strongly corrects the noise.
Attention
f When this is set for an input signal with less noise, the image may look different from what it originally was. In such a case, set it to [OFF].
[DYNAMIC IRIS]
Aperture correction and signal compensation are performed automatically based on the image to result in an image of optimum contrast.
1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC IRIS].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [DYNAMIC IRIS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] No correction.
[1] Slightly corrects aperture and compensate signals.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
76 - ENGLISH
[2] Moderately corrects aperture and signal.
[3] Strongly corrects aperture and signal.
[USER]
Set any desired correction.
Refer to “Adjusting desired correction amount” (x page 76) for details.
Adjusting desired correction amount
1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC IRIS].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [DYNAMIC IRIS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [USER].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DYNAMIC IRIS] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [AUTO IRIS], [MANUAL IRIS], or [DYNAMIC GAMMA].
6) Press qw to adjust the correction amount.
Item Adjustment
[AUTO IRIS]
(Automatic adjustment of
aperture)
[OFF] No correction.
[1] - [255]
Allows you to set in increments of 1. The larger the value, the
stronger the correction.
[MANUAL IRIS]
(Fixed adjustment of aperture)
[OFF] No correction.
[1] - [255]
Allows you to set in increments of 1. The larger the value, the
stronger the correction.
[DYNAMIC GAMMA]
(Adjustment of signal
compensation)
[OFF] No correction.
[1] Slightly compensates the signal.
[2] Moderately compensates the signal.
[3] Strongly compensates the signal.
Note
f When [DYNAMIC GAMMA] is set to [3], the contrast will be maximized.
f Brightness control and dynamic iris operate simultaneously, but the iris is fully open and does not operate while a brightness measurement
is performed.
f If [DLP Link] is set to [ON], [DYNAMIC IRIS] is xed to [OFF] while 3D images are displayed.
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
The projector will automatically detect the input signal, but you can set the system method manually when an unstable signal is input. Set the
system method matching the input signal.
1) Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
3) Press as to select a system format.
f If inputting signals via the <SDI IN> terminal connection, select the system method by pressing asqw. (Only for PT-DZ870E)
f Available system formats vary depending on the input signal.
Terminal System format
<VIDEO IN> terminal, <G/
Y>/<B/P
B
/C> terminals
Select [AUTO], [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL], [PAL-M], [PAL-N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].
Set it to [AUTO] normally. (Setting [AUTO] will automatically select [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL],
[PAL-M], [PAL-N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].)
Switch the setting to the signal method for the TV used.
<RGB 1 IN> terminal, <RGB 2
IN> terminal
480i, 576i, or 576p signal Select [RGB] or [YC
B
C
R
].
VGA60 or 480p signal Select from [VGA60], [480p YC
B
C
R
], or [480p RGB].
Other movie-based signals Select [RGB] or [YP
B
P
R
].
<DVI-D IN> terminal
480i, 576i, 480p, or 576p
signal
Select [RGB] or [YC
B
C
R
].
Other movie-based signals Select [RGB] or [YP
B
P
R
].
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 77
Terminal System format
<HDMI IN> terminal, <DIGITAL
LINK/LAN> terminal
480i, 576i, 480p, or 576p
signal
Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YC
B
C
R
].
Other movie-based signals Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YP
B
P
R
].
<SDI IN> terminal (Only for
PT-DZ870E)
Select [AUTO], [480i YC
B
C
R
], [576i YC
B
C
R
], [720/50p YP
B
P
R
], [720/60p YP
B
P
R
], [1035/60i YP
B
P
R
],
[1080/24p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/24sF YP
B
P
R
], [1080/25p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/30p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/50i YP
B
P
R
],
[1080/60i YP
B
P
R
], [1080/50p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/60p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/24p RGB], [1080/24sF RGB],
[1080/25p RGB], [1080/30p RGB], [1080/50i RGB], or [1080/60i RGB].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 178) for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector.
f This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
sRGB-compliant video
sRGB is an international standard (IEC61966-2-1) for color reproduction dened by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission).
Set according to the following steps to reproduce more faithful, sRGB compliant colors.
1) Set [COLOR MATCHING] to [OFF].
f Refer to [COLOR MATCHING] (x page 95).
2) Display the [PICTURE] menu.
f Refer to “[PICTURE] menu” (x page 71).
3) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
4) Press qw to set [NATURAL].
5) Press as to select [COLOR].
6) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to set the factory default setting.
7) Follow Steps 5) - 6) to set [TINT], [COLOR TEMPERATURE], [WHITE GAIN], [GAMMA], and [SYSTEM
DAYLIGHT VIEW] to the factory default settings.
Note
f sRGB is available for RGB signal input only.
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
78 - ENGLISH
[POSITION] menu
On the menu screen, select [POSITION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f After selecting the item, press asqw to adjust.
[SHIFT]
Move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image position projected on the screen is shifted even when the relative position of the
projector and the screen is installed correctly.
1) Press as to select [SHIFT].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHIFT] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to adjust the position.
Orientation Operation Adjustment
Vertical (up and down)
adjustment
Press the a button.
The image position moves up.
Press the s button.
The image position moves down.
Horizontal (right and left)
adjustment
Press the w button.
The image position moves to the right.
Press the q button.
The image position moves to the left.
[ASPECT]
You can switch the aspect ratio of the image.
The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in [SCREEN SETTING]. Set [SCREEN SETTING] rst. (x page 96)
1) Press as to select [ASPECT].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals.
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
ENGLISH - 79
[VID AUTO]
*1
The projector identies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signals and displays the image by
automatically switching the screen sizes between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for NTSC
signals.
[AUTO]
*2
The projector identies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signals and displays the image by
automatically switching the screen sizes between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for 480i/480p
signals.
[THROUGH] Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals.
[16:9]
Displays images with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9 when standard signals are input
*3
. Display
images without changing the aspect ratio when wide-screen signals are input
*4
.
[4:3]
Displays images without changing the aspect ratio when standard signals are input
*3
. Displays images
without changing the aspect ratio so that the images will t in the 4:3 screen when wide-screen
signals are input
*2
.
[H FIT]
Displays images using the entire width of the screen. When signals have the aspect ratio vertically
longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed
with the top and bottom parts cut off.
[V FIT]
Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When
signals have the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in
[SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed with the right and left parts cut off.
[HV FIT]
Displays images in the entire screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When the aspect ratio of
the input signals differs from that of the screen range, the images are displayed with the aspect ratio
converted to that of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT].
*1 For video signals and Y/C signals (NTSC) only
*2 For RGB (480i or 480p) signal input only
*3 Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 5:4.
*4 Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.
Note
f Some size modes are not available for certain types of input signals. [DEFAULT] cannot be selected for video signal, Y/C signal (NTSC), or
RGB (480i, 480p) signal.
f If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected, the images will appear differently from the originals.
Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio.
f If using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation, note that
adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original
copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws. Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio
adjustment and zoom function.
f If conventional (normal) 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen, the edges of the images may not
be visible or they may become distorted. Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in the original format intended by the
creator of the images.
[ZOOM]
You can adjust the image size.
When [ASPECT] is set to other than [DEFAULT] and [THROUGH]
1) Press as to select [ZOOM].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
[ON]
Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
same magnication.
5) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].
f If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
6) Press qw to adjust.
Note
f When [ASPECT] is set to [THROUGH], [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted.
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
80 - ENGLISH
When [ASPECT] is set to [DEFAULT]
1) Press as to select [ZOOM].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MODE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[INTERNAL] Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
[FULL] Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
5) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
[ON]
Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
same magnication.
7) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].
f If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
8) Press qw to adjust.
Note
f When [ASPECT] is not set to [DEFAULT], [MODE] is not displayed.
[CLOCK PHASE]
You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when there is a ickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press as to select [CLOCK PHASE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [CLOCK PHASE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust.
f Adjustment value will change between [0] and [+31]. Adjust so that the amount of interference is at a minimum.
Note
f Certain signals may not be adjustable.
f Optimal value may not be achieved if the output from the input computer is unstable.
f Optimal value may not be achieved when there is a shift in the total dot numbers.
f [CLOCK PHASE] can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
f [CLOCK PHASE] cannot be adjusted when a digital signal is input.
f If you press w while the adjustment value is [+31], the value will become [0]. If you press q while the adjustment value is [0], the value will
become [+31].
[GEOMETRY(2D)]
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
You can correct various types of distortion in a projected image.
Unique image processing technology enables projection of a square image on a special screen shape.
1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY(2D)].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Does not perform geometric adjustment.
[KEYSTONE] Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.
[CORNER CORRECTION] Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.
[CURVED] Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
ENGLISH - 81
[PC-1]
*1
Uses the computer to perform geometric adjustment.[PC-2]
*1
[PC-3]
*1
*1 Advanced skills are necessary to use a computer to control geometric adjustment. Consult your dealer. Up to three geometric adjustments
performed using the computer can be saved.
Setting [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED]
1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY(2D)].
2) Press qw to select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRY:CURVED] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select the item to adjust.
5) Press qw to adjust.
[KEYSTONE]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio for the lens used.
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL BALANCE] [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the vertical
direction.
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the horizontal
direction.
[CURVED]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio for the lens used.
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL ARC] [HORIZONTAL ARC]
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
82 - ENGLISH
[CURVED]
[VERTICAL BALANCE]
[HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
[MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO]
Select [ON] to correct while keeping the aspect ratio.
Setting [CORNER CORRECTION]
1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY(2D)].
2) Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select the item to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press asqw to adjust.
[CORNER CORRECTION]
[UPPER LEFT]
[UPPER RIGHT] [LOWER LEFT] [LOWER RIGHT]
[LINEARITY]
Horizontal direction
Vertical direction
Note
f The menu or logo may run off the screen when [GEOMETRY(2D)] is set.
f If [EDGE BLENDING] (x page 86) adjustment and [GEOMETRY(2D)] are used together, correct edge blending adjustment may not be
possible in certain environments.
f The optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) can be used to expand the correctable range. To purchase the product, consult your dealer.
f [GEOMETRY(2D)] is selectable only when a 2D image is displayed. The setting is invalid while a 3D image is displayed. When executing
the keystone correction while displaying a 3D image, set with [KEYSTONE(3D)].
However, if [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to [DUAL (LEFT)] or [DUAL (RIGHT)], the keystone correction becomes possible by selecting
[GEOMETRY(2D)] while a 3D image is displayed.
[KEYSTONE(3D)]
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
While displaying a 3D image, corrects the keystone distortion that occurs when the projector is installed tilted or when the screen is tilted.
1) Press as to select [KEYSTONE(3D)].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [KEYSTONE(3D)] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select the item to adjust.
4) Press qw to adjust.
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
ENGLISH - 83
[KEYSTONE] [SUB KEYSTONE]
[LINEARITY]
Note
f The menu or logo may run off the screen when adjustments are performed with [KEYSTONE(3D)].
f Correcting up to ±40° for the tilt in the vertical direction is available in the adjustments with [KEYSTONE(3D)]. However, the image quality
will degrade and it will get harder to focus with more correction. Install the projector so that the correction will be as small as possible. (The
correction is ±30° when the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) or ultra-short focus zoom lens (Model No.: ET-DLE085) is used.)
f Screen size will also change when [KEYSTONE(3D)] is used to perform various adjustments.
f When the keystone is corrected with [KEYSTONE(3D)], the edge blending cannot be adjusted together.
f Aspect ratio of the image size may shift depending on the correction or lens zoom value.
f [KEYSTONE(3D)] is selectable only when a 3D image is displayed. The setting is invalid while a 2D image is displayed.
However, when [DUAL (LEFT)] or [DUAL (RIGHT)] is set to [3D SYSTEM SETTING], [KEYSTONE(3D)] cannot be selected.
f When executing the keystone correction while displaying a 2D image, set with [GEOMETRY(2D)].
[KEYSTONE]
(Only for PT-DW830E, PT-DX100E)
You can correct the keystone distortion that occurs when the projector is installed tilted or when the screen is tilted.
1) Press as to select [KEYSTONE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [KEYSTONE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select the item to adjust.
4) Press qw to adjust.
[KEYSTONE] [SUB KEYSTONE]
[LINEARITY]
Note
f The menu or logo may run off the screen when adjustments are performed with [KEYSTONE].
f Correcting up to ±40° for the tilt in the vertical direction is available for adjustments with [KEYSTONE]. However, the image quality will
degrade and it will get harder to focus with more correction. Install the projector so that the correction will be as small as possible. (The
correction is ±30° when the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) or ultra-short focus zoom lens (Model No.: ET-DLE085) is used.)
f Screen size will also change when [KEYSTONE] is used to perform various adjustments.
f When the keystone is corrected with [KEYSTONE], the edge blending cannot be adjusted together.
f Aspect ratio of the image size may shift depending on the correction or lens zoom value.
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
84 - ENGLISH
[ADVANCED MENU] menu
On the menu screen, select [ADVANCED MENU] from the main menu, and select an item from
the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f After selecting the item, press asqw to adjust.
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]
You can increase the vertical resolution and enhance the image quality by performing cinema processing when the PAL (or SECAM) 576i
signal, the NTSC 480i signal, and 1080/50i, 1080/60i are input.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO] Performs automatic detection and cinema processing. (Factory default)
[OFF] Does not perform cinema processing.
[30p FIXED]
Only during 480i or 1080/60i
signal input
Performs forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown).
[25p FIXED]
Only during 576i or 1080/50i
signal input
Note
f In [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY], the picture quality will degrade when a signal other than the 2:2 pulldown is set as [25p FIXED] or [30p
FIXED]. (Vertical resolution will degrade.)
f When [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST], [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set.
[BLANKING]
You can adjust the blanking width if there are noises at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly running out from the screen while an
image from the VCR or other devices are projected.
1) Press as to select [BLANKING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BLANKING] adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT].
f When [CUSTOM MASKING] is set to an item ([PC-1], [PC-2], or [PC-3]) other than [OFF], the blanking width can be adjusted to any
shape using the computer. Up to three blanking settings adjusted using the computer can be saved.
To use the [CUSTOM MASKING] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To purchase the product,
consult your dealer.
4) Press qw to adjust the blanking width.
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
ENGLISH - 85
Blanking correction Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Top of the screen [UPPER]
Press the q
button.
The blanking zone
moves upward.
PT-DZ870E: Top to bottom
0 - 599
PT-DW830E: Top to bottom
0 - 399
PT-DX100E: Top to bottom
0 - 383
Press the w
button.
The blanking zone
moves downward.
Bottom of the
screen
[LOWER]
Press the w
button.
The blanking zone
moves upward.
Press the q
button.
The blanking zone
moves downward.
Left side of the
screen
[LEFT]
Press the w
button.
The blanking zone
moves to the right.
PT-DZ870E: Left to right
0 - 959
PT-DW830E: Left to right
0 - 639
PT-DX100E: Left to right
0 - 511
Press the q
button.
The blanking zone
moves to the left.
Right side of the
screen
[RIGHT]
Press the q
button.
The blanking zone
moves to the right.
Press the w
button.
The blanking zone
moves to the left.
[INPUT RESOLUTION]
You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when there is a ickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press as to select [INPUT RESOLUTION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [INPUT RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [TOTAL DOTS], [DISPLAY DOTS], [TOTAL LINES], or [DISPLAY LINES], and press
qw to adjust each item.
f Values corresponding to the signal being input are displayed automatically for each item. Increase or decrease the displayed values
and adjust to the optimal point viewing the screen when there are vertical stripes or sections are missing from the screen.
Note
f Previously mentioned vertical banding will not occur with all white signal input.
f The image may be disrupted while performing the adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.
f [INPUT RESOLUTION] can be adjusted only when an RGB signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
f Certain signals may not be adjustable.
[CLAMP POSITION]
You can adjust the optimal point when the black part of the image is blunt or it has turned green.
1) Press as to select [CLAMP POSITION].
2) Press qw to adjust.
Status Rough guide for optimal value Range of adjustment
The black part is blunt.
The point where bluntness of the black part improves the most is
the optimal value.
1 - 255
The black part is green.
The point where the green part becomes black, and the bluntness
has improved is the optimal value.
Note
f [CLAMP POSITION] can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
f Certain signals may not be adjustable.
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
86 - ENGLISH
[EDGE BLENDING]
The edge blending function allows multiple projector images to be seamlessly overlapped by using the inclination of the brightness at the
overlapped area.
1) Press as to select [EDGE BLENDING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Sets the edge blending function to off.
[ON] Use the setting value of the internal distortion of the set for the inclination of the edge blending area.
[USER]
Use the user-setting value for the inclination of the edge blending area. (Conguration/registration
requires separate software. Consult your dealer.)
f To adjust edge blending, proceed to Step 3).
3) When [ON] or [USER] is selected, press the <ENTER> button.
f The [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to specify the location to be corrected.
f When joining at top: Set [UPPER] to [ON]
f When joining at bottom: Set [LOWER] to [ON]
f When joining at left: Set [LEFT] to [ON]
f When joining at right: Set [RIGHT] to [ON]
5) Press qw to switch between [ON] and [OFF].
6) Press as to select [START] or [WIDTH].
7) Press qw to adjust the starting position or correction width.
8) Press as to select [MARKER].
9) Press qw to switch to [ON].
f A marker for image position adjustment is displayed. The position where the red and green lines overlap for the projectors to be joined
will be the optimal point. Make sure to set the correction width for the projectors to be joined with the same value. Optimal joining is not
possible with projectors that have different correction widths.
The optimal point is the point at which these lines overlap.
Green line
Red line
10) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST].
11) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen is displayed.
f By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] on the [EDGE BLENDING] screen to [ON], the black test pattern is displayed when you enter the
[BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen.
12) Press as to select [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
13) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed.
f If [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF], [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually.
14) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
f After the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen.
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
ENGLISH - 87
15) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] in [BLACK BORDER WIDTH]
16) Press qw to set the region (width) of the [BLACK BORDER WIDTH] adjustment.
f When PT-DZ870E is used, proceed to Step 17).
f When PT-DW830E or PT-DX100E is used, proceed to Step 19).
17) Press as to select [UPPER KEYSTONE AREA], [LOWER KEYSTONE AREA], [LEFT KEYSTONE
AREA], or [RIGHT KEYSTONE AREA].
18) Press qw to adjust the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK
BORDER LEVEL].
19) Press as to select [BLACK BORDER LEVEL].
20) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] screen is displayed.
f If [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF], [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually.
21) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
[BLACK BORDER WIDTH] (Right)
Projection range Edge blending [WIDTH] (Right)
[MARKER] (Red)
Edge blending [START] (Right)
([MARKER] (Green))
[BLACK BORDER LEVEL]
[OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] (Right)
[NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL]
Note
f [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] is a function that makes the increased brightness in black level of the overlapping image area difcult to notice
when [EDGE BLENDING] is used to congure multiple screens. The optimal point of correction is set by adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED
BLACK LEVEL] so the black level of the overlapping image area will be the same level as the non-overlapping area. If the border area of the
part where the image is overlapping and the non-overlapping part gets brighter after adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL], adjust
the width of the top, bottom, left, or right. Adjust [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] when the width adjustment makes only the border area darker.
f The joining part may look discontinuous depending on the position you are looking from when a screen with high gain or rear screen is used.
f When conguring multiple screens using both horizontal and vertical edge blending, adjust [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] rst before
making adjustments in Step 12). Adjustment method is same as the procedure of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
f If only horizontal or vertical edge blending is used, set all items in [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] to 0.
f [AUTO TESTPATTERN] settings change together with the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] of [COLOR MATCHING].
f Adjustment of the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is a function to perform
the adjustment of [GEOMETRY(2D)] (x page 80) together with the edge blending. If [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] is tilted by
correcting the keystone distortion from [KEYSTONE] in [GEOMETRY(2D)], perform Steps 17)18) to adjust the edge blending according to
the shape of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
f When the keystone is corrected with [KEYSTONE(3D)], the edge blending cannot be adjusted together. (Only for PT-DZ870E)
f When the keystone is corrected with [KEYSTONE], the edge blending cannot be adjusted together. (Only for PT-DW830E, PT-DX100E)
[FRAME RESPONSE]
Set image frame delay.
1) Press as to select [FRAME RESPONSE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL] Standard setting.
[FAST]
*1
Simplies the image processing to reduce image frame delay.
[FIXED]
*2
Sets image frame delay to be constant regardless of the image position or magnication.
*1 When input signals are other than interlaced signals, [FAST] cannot be set.
*2 Only when movie-based signals and still image signals with the vertical scanning frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz are input
Note
f When [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST], picture quality deteriorates. Also, [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set.
f [FRAME RESPONSE] cannot be set during P IN P.
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
88 - ENGLISH
[FRAME LOCK]
Set this to view 3D display when the vertical scanning frequency of the signal is 25 Hz, 50 Hz, and 100 Hz.
1) Press as to select [FRAME LOCK].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Decreases the ickering of the display.
[ON] Synchronizes the display to the vertical scanning frequency of the input signal.
Note
f [FRAME LOCK] is not displayed when the vertical scanning frequency of a signal other than the above is input or 2D images are displayed.
f The screen may icker when [FRAME LOCK] is set to [ON].
f The display may look discontinuous when [FRAME LOCK] is set to [OFF].
[RASTER POSITION]
This will allow the position of the image to move within the display area arbitrarily when the input image is not using the whole display area.
1) Press as to select [RASTER POSITION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RASTER POSITION] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to adjust the position.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
ENGLISH - 89
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] from the main menu, and display the sub-
menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f Press as to select a language, and press the <ENTER> button to set.
Changing the display language
You can select the language of the on-screen display.
ENTER
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
SELECT
SET
f Various menus, settings, adjustment screens, control button names, etc., are displayed in the selected language.
f The language can be changed to English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Japanese, Chinese, Russian, or Korean.
Note
f The on-screen display language of the projector is set to English by default and when [ALL USER DATA] (x page 123) in [INITIALIZE] is
executed.
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
90 - ENGLISH
[3D SETTINGS] menu
On the menu screen, select [3D SETTINGS] from the main menu, and select an item from the
sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f After selecting the item, press asqw to set.
[3D SYSTEM SETTING]
Set a picture display method for use during 3D signal input as necessary for the 3D system in use.
1) Press as to select [3D SYSTEM SETTING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[SINGLE]
During 3D signal input, images for the right eye and images for the left eye are alternately displayed
with the frame sequential system.
[DUAL (LEFT)] Only images for the left eye are displayed during 3D signal input.
[DUAL (RIGHT)] Only images for the right eye are displayed during 3D signal input.
Note
f When 2D images are input, 2D images are displayed regardless of [3D SYSTEM SETTING] settings.
[DLP Link]
You can set this function when using the 3D eyewear that supports DLP Link.
1) Press as to select [DLP Link].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Enables the DLP Link function.
[OFF] Disables the DLP Link function.
Note
f If [DLP Link] is set to [ON], [DYNAMIC IRIS] is xed to [OFF] while 3D images are displayed.
[3D SYNC SETTING]
Set the way in which the <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal and the <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal will be used.
Attention
f Before connecting external devices to the <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal and the <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal using cables, complete the
[3D SYNC MODE] setting and conrm that the external devices to be connected are turned off.
f Changing [3D SYNC MODE] while the cables are connected may result in malfunctions of the projector or the connected external devices.
1) Press as to select [3D SYNC SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The precaution message related to [3D SYNC SETTING] is displayed.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3D SYNC SETTING] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [3D SYNC MODE].
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
ENGLISH - 91
5) Press qw to switch the item.
[3D SYNC MODE] Items set in [3D SYNC1] Items set in [3D SYNC2]
[OFF] Not used. Not used.
[1] 3D trigger output Stereo synch output
[2] 3D trigger output 3D trigger output
[3] Stereo synch input Through 3D SYNC1
[4] Stereo synch input Stereo synch output
[5] Stereo synch input 3D trigger output
[6] Frame synch input Through 3D SYNC1
[7] Frame synch input Stereo synch output
[8] Frame synch input 3D trigger output
[9] 3D trigger output Frame synch output
[10] Stereo synch output Frame synch output
[11] 3D IR TRANSMITTER (+) output 3D IR TRANSMITTER (
-
) output
6) When [1], [4], [7], or [10] is selected, press as to select [STEREO SYNC OUTPUT DELAY], and press
qw to set the amount of delay output.
[0us] - [25000us] Allows you to set in increments of 10 us.
f To synchronize multiple projectors to display 3D images, use a frame synch input and output.
Select [9] or [10] for the rst projector.
Select [6], [7], or [8] for the second and subsequent projectors.
f Stereo synchronization is a signal having a 50 % duty cycle where High is for the left eye and Low is for the right eye.
f “H” is output to the 3D image display and “L” is output to the 2D image display from the terminal for which 3D trigger output is selected.
Note
f [11] or [3D SYNC MODE] is the setting when the 3D IR transmitter TY-3DTRW of Panasonic is used with the projector. Consult your dealer
regarding the connection method.
[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]
Set this item to input and use 3D video signals of the simultaneous system.
1) Press as to select [3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [LEFT:RGB1 RIGHT:RGB2] or [LEFT:HDMI RIGHT:DVI-D].
4) Press qw to switch the setting.
[OFF] Does not display 3D images of the simultaneous system.
[AUTO] Displays 3D images of the simultaneous system.
Note
f When set to [AUTO], 3D images are displayed when the same 3D compatible signals are entered to each input. However, the P IN P status
during P IN P is maintained.
f This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
f Certain signals may not function properly.
[3D INPUT FORMAT]
Set the 3D format for the image signals being input.
Set a 3D format that matches the input signal.
1) Press as to select [3D INPUT FORMAT].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3D INPUT FORMAT] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a 3D format.
[AUTO]
*1
Automatically detects 3D format of input image signals and displays images.
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
92 - ENGLISH
[NATIVE] Forcibly displays 2D images regardless of input image signals.
[SIMULTANEOUS]
*2
Forcibly displays 3D images in simultaneous system regardless of input video signals.
[SIDE BY SIDE] Forcibly displays 3D images in side by side format regardless of input image signals.
[TOP AND BOTTOM] Forcibly displays 3D images in top and bottom format regardless of input image signals.
[LINE BY LINE]
*3
Forcibly displays 3D images in line by line system regardless of input video signals.
[FRAME SEQUENTIAL]
*4
Forcibly displays 3D images in frame sequential format regardless of input image signals.
*1 During DVI-D, HDMI, or DIGITAL LINK input only
*2 During 3G-SDI level B input only
*3 Only while signals other than interlaced signals are input
*4 Only while progressive signals with the vertical scanning frequency of 100 Hz or 120 Hz are input to the <RGB1>/<RGB2>/<DVI-D> terminals
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f When set to [AUTO], [SIMULTANEOUS], [SIDE BY SIDE], [TOP AND BOTTOM], [LINE BY LINE], or [FRAME SEQUENTIAL], 3D images
are not displayed in [3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]. In [AUTO], however, this only occurs when 3D format can be recognized.
f This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
[3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION]
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
Set the output frame rate when a 3D signal with the vertical scanning frequency of 24 Hz is input.
1) Press as to select [3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[144fps] Displays images with the frame rate of 144 fps.
[96fps] Displays images with the frame rate of 96 fps.
Note
f This function is enabled only when a 3D signal with the vertical scanning frequency of 24 Hz is input. The [3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION]
setting can be changed even when the corresponding signal is not input.
f When [3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION] is set to [144fps], [SCREEN SETTING] (x page 96) cannot be selected. [SCREEN FORMAT] is
xed to [16:9] and [SCREEN POSITION] cannot be adjusted. Adjust the image position using [3D 24Hz IMAGE POSITION].
f When [3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION] is set to [144fps], the image may not be displayed correctly if the function of [CUSTOM MASKING]
(x page 84), [EDGE BLENDING] (x page 86), [UNIFORMITY] (x page 103), or [DISPLAY SETTING] (x page 131) is used.
[3D 24Hz IMAGE POSITION]
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
Set the image position when a 3D signal with the vertical scanning frequency of 24 Hz is input.
1) Press as to select [3D 24Hz IMAGE POSITION].
2) Press qw to adjust the position.
f Adjust the vertical position between
-
60 and +60.
Note
f The position can be adjusted only when [3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION] is set to [144fps] and a 3D signal with the vertical scanning
frequency of 24 Hz is input.
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
Display images by inverting the timing of horizontal image switching. Change the settings when there is something wrong with the 3D image
being viewed.
1) Press as to select [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL] Do not change the [NORMAL] setting if the 3D images are displayed correctly.
[SWAPPED] Select this when left and right 3D images are swapped to be displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
ENGLISH - 93
Note
f This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to other than [SINGLE].
[SUB CLOCK PHASE]
You can adjust the image when the image ickers or outline blurs.
1) Press as to select [SUB CLOCK PHASE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [SUB CLOCK PHASE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust.
f Adjustment value will change between [0] and [+31]. Adjust so that the amount of interference is at a minimum.
Note
f Enables during simultaneous system 3D video signal input to RGB1 and RGB2 and adjusts the images for the right eye.
f This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to other than [SINGLE].
f This is disabled when [3D TEST PATTERN] is displayed.
f This is disabled when [3D TEST MODE] is set to other than [NORMAL].
[3D FRAME DELAY]
Adjust the timing of the left-right switch of an image.
1) Press as to select [3D FRAME DELAY].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[0us] - [25000us] Allows you to set in increments of 10 us.
f The adjustment range depends on the input signal.
[3D TEST MODE]
Set the image display system for use with 3D system adjustments.
1) Press as to select [3D TEST MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[NORMAL] Standard setting.
[LEFT/LEFT] Both the left eye image and right eye image display the left eye input signal.
[RIGHT/RIGHT] Both the left eye image and right eye image display the right eye input signal.
[LEFT/BLACK]
The left eye input signal is displayed in the left eye image and a completely black image is displayed
in the right eye image.
[BLACK/RIGHT]
A completely black image is displayed in the left eye image and the right input signal is displayed in
the right eye image.
Note
f The [3D TEST MODE] settings return to [NORMAL] when the projector is switched off.
f This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to other than [SINGLE].
f This is disabled when [3D TEST PATTERN] is displayed.
[3D TEST PATTERN]
The 3D test pattern can be used to check operation and make adjustments even without a 3D signal.
1) Press as to select [3D TEST PATTERN].
2) Press qw to switch [3D TEST PATTERN].
f Select a test pattern so that it is easy to check operations and make adjustments.
Note
f The 3D test pattern cannot be displayed when the following inputs are selected.
g VIDEO input
g RGB1 input (only when [RGB IN] is set to [Y/C])
f This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to other than [SINGLE].
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
94 - ENGLISH
f Displays the 3D test pattern in 60 Hz vertical scanning frequency when no signal is input. When a signal is input, the 3D test pattern is
displayed in the vertical scanning frequency that is same as the input signal.
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE]
Set to show or hide the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.
1) Press as to select [SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Shows the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.
[OFF] Hides the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.
Note
f Set to [OFF] to hide the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.
f A conrmation screen is displayed when switched from [ON] to [OFF]. Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button to change
the setting to [OFF].
Attention
f When 3D images are viewed by unspecied number of people for commercial use, display the safety precautions message related to 3D
viewing to notify viewers.
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS]
Show the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing.
1) Press as to select [3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS] screen is displayed.
f Press qw to switch the page.
1/2
2/2
3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
If you view 3D images, please note below.
In addition, when 3D images will be viewed
by unspecified number of people
or used for commercial applications,
someone in authority should convey
the following precautions.
To enjoy 3D images safely and comfortably,
please refer to the Operating Instructions
for in-depth description.
CHANGE
EXIT
3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please refrain from viewing 3D images
if you do not feel well or are experiencing
visual fatigue.
Please use the contents which has been
properly made for 3D.
View from at least the recommended distance.
(3 times the effective height of the screen)
Refer to the Operating Instructions
if this message is no longer needed.
CHANGE
EXIT
MENU MENU
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 95
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY OPTION] from the main menu, and select an item from
the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f After selecting the item, press asqw to set.
[COLOR MATCHING]
Correct the color difference between projectors when using multiple projectors simultaneously.
Adjusting the color matching as desired
1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Color matching adjustment is not carried out.
[3COLORS] Adjusts the three colors [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
[7COLORS] Adjusts the seven colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE].
[MEASURED]
Refer to “Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter” (x page 95) for details about this mode.
3) Select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] ([RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA],
[YELLOW], or [WHITE] for [7COLORS]).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3COLORS:RED], [3COLORS:GREEN], or [3COLORS:BLUE] screen is displayed.
For [7COLORS], the [7COLORS:RED], [7COLORS:GREEN], [7COLORS:BLUE], [7COLORS:CYAN], [7COLORS:MAGENTA],
[7COLORS:YELLOW], or [7COLORS:WHITE] screen is displayed.
f Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display a test pattern of selected colors.
6) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
7) Press qw to adjust.
f The adjustment value changes between 0
*1
and 2 048.
*1 The lower limit varies depending on the adjusting color.
Note
f Operation when correcting the adjustment color
When the correction color same as the adjustment color is changed: The luminance of the adjustment color changes.
When correction color red is changed: Red is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color green is changed: Green is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color blue is changed: Blue is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
f This adjustment should be carried out by a person who is familiar with the projector or by a service person because a high level of skill is
required to make a successful adjustment.
f Pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control will restore the factory default settings for all items.
f If [COLOR MATCHING] is set to other than [OFF], [COLOR CORRECTION] is xed to [OFF], and [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is xed to
[USER1]. (However, [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] cannot be adjusted.)
Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter
Use a colorimeter that can measure chromaticity coordinates and luminance to change the colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN],
[MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] to desired colors.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
96 - ENGLISH
1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].
2) Press qw to select [MEASURED].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [MEASURED DATA].
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [MEASURED DATA] screen is displayed.
6) Measure the current luminance (Y) and the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) using the colorimeter.
7) Press as to select a color, and press qw to adjust the setting.
f Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display a test pattern of selected colors.
8) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.
f The [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.
9) Press as to select [TARGET DATA].
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [TARGET DATA] screen is displayed.
11) Press as to select a color and press qw to input coordinates for desired colors.
f Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display a test pattern of selected colors.
12) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.
Note
f Colors are not displayed properly when target data is a color outside the region of this projector.
f Set the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to automatically display a test pattern for use in adjusting the selected adjustment colors.
f When using a colorimeter or similar instrument to measure measurement data, measure the colors displayed with [AUTO TESTPATTERN].
f A difference in the color coordinates of target data and measurement values obtained from an instrument may occur for certain instruments
and measurement environments used.
[COLOR CORRECTION]
Colors can be adjusted and registered for each input signal format.
1) Press as to select [COLOR CORRECTION].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Standard setting
[USER]
For each of the following four signal formats: VIDEO, Y/C, RGB, and YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
, six colors of red,
green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow can be adjusted and registered. Press the <ENTER> button
to set the details. Adjustment is possible within the range of
-
31 - +31.
[SCREEN SETTING]
Set the screen size.
When changing the aspect of a projected image, correct to the optimum image position for the set screen. Set as necessary for the screen in
use.
1) Press as to select [SCREEN SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SCREEN SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the [SCREEN FORMAT] item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
Model No. [SCREEN FORMAT] Range when [SCREEN POSITION] is selected
PT-DZ870E
[16:10] Cannot be adjusted.
[4:3] Adjusts the horizontal position between
-
160 and 160.
[16:9] Adjusts the vertical position between
-
60 and 60.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 97
Model No. [SCREEN FORMAT] Range when [SCREEN POSITION] is selected
PT-DW830E
[16:10] Cannot be adjusted.
[16:9] Adjusts the vertical position between
-
40 and 40.
PT-DX100E
[4:3] Cannot be adjusted.
[16:9] Adjusts the vertical position between
-
96 and 96.
4) Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].
f If [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10] in PT-DZ870E and PT-DW830E, or [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [4:3] in PT-DX100E, then
selection and adjustment of [SCREEN POSITION] are not available.
5) Press qw to adjust [SCREEN POSITION].
Note
f When [3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION] (x page 92) is set to [144fps], [SCREEN SETTING] cannot be selected. [SCREEN FORMAT] is
xed to [16:9].
[AUTO SIGNAL]
Set whether to execute automatic setup of signals automatically.
The screen display position or signal level can be adjusted automatically without pressing the <AUTO SETUP> button on the remote control
on each occasion if you input unregistered signals frequently at meetings, etc.
1) Press as to select [AUTO SIGNAL].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Sets the auto signal function to off.
[ON]
Executes automatic setup automatically when images are changed to unregistered signals during
projection.
[AUTO SETUP]
Set this when adjusting a special signal or horizontally long (such as 16:9) signal.
Setting with [MODE]
1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MODE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
[WIDE] Select when an image aspect is a wide-screen signal, which does not meet the [DEFAULT] settings.
[USER] Select when receiving a signal with a special horizontal resolution (number of display dots).
f When [DEFAULT] or [WIDE] is selected, proceed to Step 7).
f When [USER] is selected, proceed to Step 5).
5) Press as to select [DISPLAY DOTS], and press qw to adjust [DISPLAY DOTS] to the horizontal
resolution of the signal source.
6) Press as to select [MODE].
7) Press the <ENTER> button.
f Automatic adjustment is executed. [PROGRESS] is displayed while automatically adjusting. When complete, the system returns to the
[AUTO SETUP] screen.
Adjusting position automatically
1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
98 - ENGLISH
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [POSITION ADJUST].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Does not perform automatic adjustment.
[ON] Adjust the screen position and size when automatic setup is executed.
Adjusting signal level automatically
1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Does not perform automatic adjustment.
[ON]
Adjusts black level (on-screen menu [BRIGHTNESS]) and white level (on-screen menu
[CONTRAST]) when automatic setup is executed.
Note
f [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST] may not function properly unless a still image containing clear blacks and whites is input.
[RGB IN]
Set to match the signal to input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.
Setting [RGB1 INPUT SETTING]
1) Press as to select [RGB IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RGB1 INPUT SETTING].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[RGB/YP
B
P
R
] Select when inputting an RGB signal or YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signals to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.
[Y/C] Select when inputting a luminance signal and color signal to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.
Switching the slice level of an input sync signal
1) Press as to select [RGB IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RGB1 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] or [RGB2 SYNC SLICE LEVEL].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[LOW] Sets the slice level to [LOW].
[HIGH] Sets the slice level to [HIGH].
[DVI-D IN]
Switch the setting when the external device is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal of the projector and the image is not projected correctly.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 99
1) Press as to select [DVI-D IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DVI-D IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [EDID].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[EDID3] Recognizes movie-based video signals and still image signals automatically.
[EDID1]
Select mainly when an external device that outputs movie-based video signals (such as a blu-ray disc
player) is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
[EDID2:PC]
Select mainly when an external device that outputs still image signals (such as a computer) is
connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
5) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
[0-255:PC] Select when an external device (such as a computer) is connected via the DVI-D terminal output.
[16-235]
Select when an external device (such as a blu-ray disc player) is connected via the HDMI terminal
output using a conversion cable, etc.
Note
f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
f The data for Plug and play will change when the setting is changed. Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 178) for a resolution that
supports plug and play.
[HDMI IN]
Switch the setting when the external device is connected to the <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector and the image is not projected correctly.
1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the [SIGNAL LEVEL] item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
[64-940]
Select when the HDMI terminal of an external device (such as a blu-ray disc player) is connected to
the <HDMI IN> terminal.
[0-1023]
Select when the DVI-D terminal output of an external device (such as a computer) is connected to the
<HDMI IN> terminal via a conversion cable or similar cable.
Select also when the HDMI terminal output of a computer or other device is connected to the <HDMI
IN> terminal.
Note
f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
f The displayed signal level is assumed when the input is 30 bits.
[DIGITAL LINK IN]
Set the signal level when DIGITAL LINK input is selected.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch [SIGNAL LEVEL].
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
100 - ENGLISH
[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
[64-940]
Select when the HDMI terminal output of an external device (such as a blu-ray disc player) is
connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
[0-1023]
Select this when the DVI-D terminal output or HDMI terminal output of an external device (such as a
computer) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
Note
f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
[SDI IN]
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
Set to match the signal to input to the <SDI IN> terminal.
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL]
Select the amplitude of the signal to input.
1) Press as to select [SDI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[64-940] Normally use this setting.
[4-1019] Select when gray is displayed as black.
Setting [BIT DEPTH]
1) Press as to select [SDI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BIT DEPTH].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[AUTO] Automatically select 12 bits or 10 bits.
[12-bit] Fix to 12 bits.
[10-bit] Fix to 10 bits.
Setting [3G-SDI MAPPING]
1) Press as to select [SDI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [3G-SDI MAPPING].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[AUTO] Automatically select level A or level B.
[LEVEL A] Fix to level A.
[LEVEL B] Fix to level B.
Note
f Does not operate during SD-SDI or HD-SDI input.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 101
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
Set the on-screen display.
Setting [OSD POSITION]
Set the position of the menu screen (OSD).
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OSD POSITION].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[2] Sets to the center left of the screen.
[3] Sets to the bottom left of the screen.
[4] Sets to the top center of the screen.
[5] Sets to the center of the screen.
[6] Sets to the bottom center of the screen.
[7] Sets to the upper right of the screen.
[8] Sets to the center right of the screen.
[9] Sets to the bottom right of the screen.
[1] Sets to the upper left of the screen.
Setting [OSD DESIGN]
Set the color of the menu screen (OSD).
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OSD DESIGN].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[1] Sets to yellow.
[2] Sets to blue.
[3] Sets to white.
[4] Sets to green.
[5] Sets to peach.
[6] Sets to brown.
Setting [OSD MEMORY]
Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD) cursor.
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OSD MEMORY].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Holds the cursor position.
[OFF] Does not hold the cursor position.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
102 - ENGLISH
Note
f Even if [OSD MEMORY] is set to [ON], the cursor position will not be held when the <MAIN POWER> switch of the projector body is turned
<OFF>.
Setting [INPUT GUIDE]
Set whether to display the input guide (input terminal name, signal name, and memory number currently selected) in the position set in the
[OSD POSITION].
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INPUT GUIDE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Displays the input guide.
[OFF] Hides the input guide.
Setting [WARNING MESSAGE]
Set the display/hide of the warning message.
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [WARNING MESSAGE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Displays the warning message.
[OFF] Hides the warning message.
[CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] (NTSC or 480i YC
B
C
R
signal input only)
Set closed captions.
Selecting the closed caption display
1) Press as to select [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [CLOSED CAPTION].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Hides closed captions.
[ON] Displays closed captions.
f When [ON] is selected, proceed to Step 5).
5) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Setting the closed caption display
1) Press as to select [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING].
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 103
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MODE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[CC1] Displays CC1 data.
[CC2] Displays CC2 data.
[CC3] Displays CC3 data.
[CC4] Displays CC4 data.
Note
f Closed caption is a function that displays text information of video signals mainly used in North America. Captions may not be displayed
depending on the connected devices or contents being played back.
f [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] can be selected only if NTSC or 480i YC
B
C
R
signal is input.
f If [CLOSED CAPTION] is set to [ON], brightness of images may change depending on the external devices compatible with closed caption
function to be connected or contents to be used.
f If a closed caption signal of the selected mode is input, the security message set in the [SECURITY] menu [DISPLAY SETTING]
(x page 131) is not displayed.
f Closed captions are not displayed when the menu screen is displayed.
f When the correction of [KEYSTONE] is large, all characters may not be displayed. (Only for PT-DW830E, PT-DX100E)
[BACK COLOR]
Set the display of the projected screen when there is no signal input.
1) Press as to select [BACK COLOR].
2) Press qw to switch [BACK COLOR].
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[BLUE] Displays the entire projection area in blue.
[BLACK] Displays the entire projection area in black.
[DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
Note
f To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
[STARTUP LOGO]
Set the logo display when the power is turned on.
1) Press as to select [STARTUP LOGO].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
[NONE] Disables the startup logo display.
Note
f The startup logo will disappear in approximately 15 seconds.
f To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
[UNIFORMITY]
Correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen.
Setting each color
1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
104 - ENGLISH
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].
4) Press qw to adjust the level.
Parameter Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
[VERTICAL]
Press the w button.
The lower-side brightness
decreases, or the upper-side
brightness increases.
-
127 - 127
Press the q button.
The upper-side brightness
decreases, or the lower-side
brightness increases.
[HORIZONTAL]
Press the w button.
The right-side brightness
decreases, or the left-side
brightness increases.
Press the q button.
The left-side brightness
decreases, or the right-side
brightness increases.
Setting [PC CORRECTION]
To use the [PC CORRECTION] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To purchase the product, consult your
dealer.
1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [PC CORRECTION].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Does not use a computer to correct.
[ON]
*1
Use a computer to correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen.
*1 Advanced skills are necessary to use computer controls to correct. Consult your dealer.
Note
f [UNIFORMITY] can be set for each [LAMP SELECT] setting.
f The [UNIFORMITY] settings are not reset to the factory default when [INITIALIZE] is executed.
[SHUTTER SETTING]
Set image fade-in and fade-out at opening and closing of the shutter. Set automatic opening and closing of the shutter when power is turned
on/off.
Setting [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT]
1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
Item Adjustment
[FADE-IN]
[FADE-OUT]
[OFF] Does not set fade-in or fade-out.
[0.5s] - [10.0s]
Allows you to set the fade-in or fade-out time.
Item can be selected from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s].
For [0.5s] - [4.0s], selection is possible in increments of 0.5.
Note
f Press the <SHUTTER> button on the remote control or the control panel during fade-in or fade-out to cancel the fade operation.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 105
Setting [STARTUP]
1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [STARTUP].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OPEN] Projection begins with the shutter open when the power is turned on.
[CLOSE] Projection begins with the shutter close when the power is turned on.
Setting [SHUT-OFF]
1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SHUT-OFF].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[KEEP CURRENT STATE] When the projector is switched off, the projector turns into standby with the shutter status as is.
[OPEN] When the projector is switched off, the projector turns into standby with the shutter left opened.
[CLOSE] When the projector is switched off, the projector turns into standby with the shutter left closed.
[FREEZE]
Pause the projected image temporarily regardless of the playback of the external device.
1) Press as to select [FREEZE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f Press the <MENU> button to release.
Note
f [FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Use the input signals from a connected external device to display in a waveform. Check whether video output (luminance) signal level is within
the recommended range for the projector and adjust.
1) Press as to select [WAVEFORM MONITOR].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Does not display the waveform monitor.
[ON] Displays the waveform monitor.
3) Press the <MENU> button two times to clear.
4) Press as to select any horizontal line.
5) Press the <ENTER> button to switch the Select line to either luminance, red, green, or blue.
f Line selection items switch each time the <ENTER> is pressed only when the waveform monitor is displayed.
“Select line (luminance)” Displayed in white waveform.
“Select line (red)” Displayed in red waveform.
“Select line (green)” Displayed in green waveform.
“Select line (blue)” Displayed in blue waveform.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
106 - ENGLISH
Note
f Setting is also available from [FUNCTION BUTTON] (x page 121).
f Waveform monitor cannot be displayed in [P IN P].
f The waveform monitor turns off when [P IN P] is executed during waveform monitoring.
f The waveform monitor is not displayed when on-screen display is hidden (off).
Adjusting the waveform
Project the luminance adjustment signal of a commercial test disk (0 % (0 IRE or 7.5 IRE) – 100 % (100 IRE)) and adjust.
Signal level
Image displayable area
Screen position
1) Select “Select line (luminance)” on the waveform monitor.
2) Adjust black level.
f Use [BRIGHTNESS] in the on-screen menu [PICTURE] to adjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to the 0 % position of the
waveform monitor.
3) Adjust white level.
f Use [CONTRAST] in the on-screen menu [PICTURE] to adjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to the 100 % position of the
waveform monitor.
Adjusting red, green, and blue
1) Set [COLOR TEMPERATURE] to [USER1] or [USER2] (x page 72).
2) Select “Select line (red)” on the waveform monitor.
3) Adjust dark red areas.
f Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE LOW] to adjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor.
4) Adjust bright red areas.
f Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] to adjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to the 100 % position of the waveform
monitor.
5) Use the procedure for [RED] to adjust [GREEN] and [BLUE].
Note
f For DVI-D signal, HDMI signal, SDI signal, and DIGITAL LINK signal, conrm that the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting is correct before start
adjusting the black level.
[CUT OFF]
Each red, green, and blue color component can be removed.
1) Press as to select [CUT OFF].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CUT OFF] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Disables cutoff.
[ON] Enables cutoff.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 107
Note
f When input is switched or a signal is switched, the cutoff setting returns to its original setting (off).
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
108 - ENGLISH
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
On the menu screen, select [PROJECTOR SETUP] from the main menu, and select an item
from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f After selecting the item, press asqw to set.
[PROJECTOR ID]
The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side to enable simultaneous
control or individual control via a single remote control.
1) Press as to select [PROJECTOR ID].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ALL] Select when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.
[1] - [64] Select when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.
Note
f To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.
f When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specied during remote control or computer
control.
If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID
numbers.
f Refer to “Setting the remote control ID numbers” (x page 29) for how to set the ID number on the remote control.
[PROJECTION METHOD]
Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector.
Change the projection method if the screen display is upside down or inverted.
1) Press as to select [PROJECTION METHOD].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select the projection method.
[FRONT/FLOOR] When installing the projector on the desk, etc., in front of the screen
[FRONT/CEILING] When installing the projector in front of the screen using the Ceiling Mount Bracket (optional)
[REAR/FLOOR] When installing the projector on the desk, etc., behind the screen (with a translucent screen)
[REAR/CEILING]
When installing the projector behind the screen (with a translucent screen) using the Ceiling Mount
Bracket (optional)
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
5) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Attention
f When the [PROJECTION METHOD] setting is changed, conrm that [COOLING CONDITION] (x page 109) is set correctly.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 109
[COOLING CONDITION]
Change the fan control depending on the direction of projection.
Set [COOLING CONDITION] according to the projection direction, but set it to [AUTO] normally. Using the projector with [COOLING
CONDITION] set incorrectly may shorten the life of the lamp.
30°
30°
30°
30°
[VERTICAL UP SETTING]
[FLOOR SETTING]
[CEILING SETTING]
[VERTICAL DOWN SETTING]
Projection direction
1) Press as to select [COOLING CONDITION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [COOLING CONDITION] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a cooling condition.
f When [AUTO] is selected, the cooling conditions of [FLOOR SETTING], [CEILING SETTING], [VERTICAL UP SETTING], and
[VERTICAL DOWN SETTING] are set automatically.
You can check the setting from [COOLING CONDITION] on the [STATUS] screen.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
5) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE]
Set to [ON] when using the projector at high altitudes between 1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level.
1) Press as to select [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] When using at a location lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level
[ON]
When using at high altitudes (1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea
level)
3) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The speed of the fan increases and the operation sound becomes louder when set to [ON].
[LAMP SELECT]
Select the lamp to be turned on from the two built-in luminous lamps according to the use conditions or purposes.
1) Press as to select [LAMP SELECT].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[DUAL] Two lamps will light.
[SINGLE] One lamp will light. (The lamp with shorter runtime will automatically light.)
[LAMP1] Lamp 1 will light.
[LAMP2] Lamp 2 will light.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
110 - ENGLISH
Note
f When [SINGLE], [LAMP1], or [LAMP2] is selected, if the lamp turns off or when the runtime exceeds 3 000 hours (when [LAMP POWER] is
set to [NORMAL]), the other lamp turn on. When [DUAL] is selected, if either lamp turns off or when the runtime exceeds 3 000 hours (when
[LAMP POWER] is set to [NORMAL]), only one lamp remains on. However, if both lamps turn off or when operation times of both lamps
exceed 3 000 hours (when [LAMP POWER] is set to [NORMAL]), the projector turns into standby.
f The colors of the items indicate the status.
Green Current setting
Yellow Current setting (when there is a lamp that cannot turn on or failed to turn on)
Red Lamp that has failed to turn on
White Any other status
f When the lamp is repeatedly used in a short-time cycle, the life of the lamp shortens.
[LAMP RELAY]
Switch the lamp to be turned on automatically by specifying the day of the week and time.
The degradation of the lamp due to continuous usage can be reduced by automatically switching the lamp to be turned on when using the
projector continuously for a week or more.
1) Press as to select [LAMP RELAY].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Disables lamp relay.
[24H] Switches the lamp daily.
[1WEEK] Switches the lamp weekly.
f When [24H] or [1WEEK] is selected, proceed to Step 3).
3) Press as to select [TIME].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f Enters adjustment mode (the display is blinking).
5) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a
time.
f Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows setting of only the minute in
increments of one minute between 00 and 59.
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The adjusted time is established.
f When [1WEEK] is selected in Step 2), proceed to Step 7).
7) Press as to select [DAY OF THE WEEK].
8) Press qw to switch the item.
[SUNDAY]
Switches the lamp automatically on the set day of the week.
[MONDAY]
[TUESDAY]
[WEDNESDAY]
[THURSDAY]
[FRIDAY]
[SATURDAY]
Note
f The [LAMP RELAY] function is enabled when [DUAL] or [SINGLE] is selected in [LAMP SELECT].
f When [DUAL] is selected in [LAMP SELECT], only one lights for four hours from the specied time.
f The operating time will be the local time. (x page 121)
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 111
[LAMP POWER]
Switch the brightness of the lamp according to the operating environment of the projector or the purpose.
1) Press as to select [LAMP POWER].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[NORMAL] Select when high luminance is required.
[ECO] Select when high luminance is not required.
Note
f When [ECO] is set, you can reduce power consumption and operation noise, and extend the life of the lamp.
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]
The projector is equipped with a luminance sensor to measure brightness and functions to correct screen brightness resulting from changes in
lamp brightness.
Use the projector when using multiple projectors to display on multiple screens to reduce changes in overall brightness of the multiple screens
due to lamp degradation and suppress variation in brightness to preserve uniformity.
Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN]
Adjust the brightness when displaying multiple screens using multiple projectors.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN].
4) Press qw to adjust.
Operation
Adjustment
Range of adjustment
Brightness
Maximum amount of
brightness correction
Press the w button.
The screen becomes brighter.
The maximum amount of
correction is reduced.
20 % - 100 %
Press the q button.
The screen becomes darker.
The maximum amount of
correction is increased.
Note
f When using only one projector, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] from 100 % is the
maximum amount of brightness correction. Brightness cannot be corrected through brightness control since the maximum amount of
correction becomes 0 % when [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] is at 100 %.
f Luminance will be unsteady for eight minutes after a lamp is turned on. Make adjustments at least 8 minutes after starting projection.
f The result of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] adjustments is reected on all image signals, internal test patterns, and on-screen menus.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] setting is enabled even if [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is [OFF].
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
112 - ENGLISH
Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]
Set brightness control operation.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [MODE].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Does not correct the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.
[AUTO]
Corrects the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.
Automatically corrects screen brightness when lamp brightness changes.
[PC]
Synchronizes nine or more projectors through a computer using the dedicated software “Multi
Projector Monitoring & Control Software”
*1
.
*1 “Multi Projector Monitoring & Control Software” is included in the supplied CD-ROM.
f When [AUTO] is selected, proceed to Step 7).
7) Press as to select [LINK].
8) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Performs corrections by the brightness sensor in one projector without synchronizing with the other
projectors.
The period, in which the constant brightness kept by the small value of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
GAIN], is prolonged.
[GROUP A]
[GROUP B]
[GROUP C]
[GROUP D]
Synchronizes corrections in multiple projectors by the brightness sensor.
You can set up to four groups (A to D) within the same subnet by using the network function.
You can also register and synchronize up to eight projectors in one group.
9) Press as to select [CALIBRATION TIME].
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
f Enters adjustment mode (the display is blinking).
11) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a
time.
f Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows setting of only the minute in
increments of one minute between 00 and 59.
f If you do not specify the time, select [OFF] between 23 and 00 o’clock or between 59 and 00 minutes.
12) Press the <ENTER> button.
f [CALIBRATION TIME] is set.
f Measures the brightness at the specied time. Iris is xed to open during measurement.
13) Press as to select [CALIBRATION MESSAGE].
14) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Messages are displayed during calibration.
[OFF] Messages are not displayed during calibration.
15) Press as to select [APPLY].
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 113
16) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The set [MODE] and [LINK] are enabled, and LAMP RELAY screen alert is displayed when the [LAMP RELAY] setting is [OFF]. When
[CALIBRATION MESSAGE] is set to [ON], a calibration running message is displayed which will automatically disappear 30 seconds
after calibration completes.
f If the <ENTER> button is pressed with [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] set to other than [OFF], the brightness of the
lamp at the time the button was pressed is recorded as the standard brightness.
f If the <ENTER> button is pressed when [LINK] is set from [GROUP A] to [GROUP D], the group name is displayed on the screens of
projectors that have been set in the same group.
LINK GROUP A
Note
f When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], keep the shutter open for at least two minutes to perform the
brightness sensor calibration after completed the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] setting.
f If the shutter is closed within approx. 10 minutes after the lamp has turned on while [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to
[AUTO] or [PC], brightness cannot be measured. Therefore, brightness may be corrected approx. two minutes after the shutter opens.
f When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], the lamp brightness is automatically measured eight minutes
after the lamp is turned on, and correction is performed so that the screen brightness will be the same as the standard brightness when the
brightness control is adjusted. Lamp brightness cannot be measured during the eight minutes after it is turned on because it is not steady.
f If a lamp turns off or lamp relay is performed while [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] and when [DUAL] is set
in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [LAMP SELECT], brightness is corrected to the possible extent one minute later.
f When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] and [LINK] is set to [OFF], brightness will be corrected until it reaches
the maximum amount of correction.
f The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens, screen, or inside the projector, depending on the installation
environment of the projector.
f Adjust brightness control again when lamp degradation causes increased variation in brightness or a lamp is replaced.
f For continued use longer than 24 hours, set the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [CALIBRATION TIME], or set [LAMP RELAY]
(x page 110). If it is not set, correction will not be performed automatically.
f Brightness control and dynamic iris operate simultaneously, but the iris is fully open and does not operate while a brightness measurement
is performed.
f The [CALIBRATION TIME] setting will be reected at the time when you enter the time.
f The [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] setting will be reected at the time when items are switched using qw.
Displaying [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]
Display the brightness control status.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen is displayed.
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen display example
When [MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to
[OFF]
The screen shows the status that the brightness control is disabled.
1
RETURN
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS
MODE
PROJECTOR
OFF
MENU
When [MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to
[AUTO] and [LINK] is set to [OFF]
The screen shows the status of the brightness control in one
projector.
5
1
6
RETURN
LINK
PROJECTOR
OFF
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS
MENU
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
114 - ENGLISH
When [MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to
[AUTO] and [LINK] is set from [GROUP A] to [GROUP D]
The screen shows the status of the brightness control of
synchronized projectors (up to eight units), including the projector
being controlled through the on-screen menu.
2
1
3
4
5
7
8
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
192. 168. 30. 2
192. 168. 30. 3
192. 168. 30. 4
LINK
UPDATE
PROJECTOR
GROUP A
PROJECTOR2
PROJECTOR3
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS
MENU SELECT
When [MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to
[PC]
5
1
6
RETURN
MODE
PROJECTOR
PC
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS
MENU
1 Display the name of the projector.
2 Display the synchronized group.
3 Display the IP address of the projector.
4 Display the names and IP addresses of projectors in same group detected over the network.
5 Display the status by color.
Green: There is an allowance for brightness correction.
Yellow: There is little allowance for brightness correction.
Red: There is a brightness control error.
6 Display error detailed messages.
7 Display error messages.
When the message [Failed to apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL to some projectors.] appears, it means that synchronization with the
projector displayed in red has failed.
Press as to select the projector displayed in red, and press the <ENTER> button to display the error details.
8 Update to the latest status information.
r Error details
Error message Measures to take
[Exceed maximum number of
projectors.]
f Limit the number of projectors in one group to eight.
f When synchronizing nine or more projectors, use the dedicated software “Multi Projector
Monitoring & Control Software”
*1
through a computer.
[Please check the COMMAND
CONTROL setting.]
f Set [NETWORK CONTROL] [COMMAND CONTROL] to [ON] for the projector in error.
f Set [NETWORK CONTROL] [COMMAND PORT] of all projectors to be linked to the same value.
[Please check the USER NAME
and PASSWORD in the COMMAND
CONTROL setting.]
f Assign the same [User name] and [Password] strings that have web control administrator rights to
all projectors to be linked.
[Cannot apply BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL. Please check projector
status.]
f The projector is in standby. Switch on the power.
[Brightness Sensor Error]
f There is a problem with the brightness sensor. If problems persist even after switching on the
power, consult your dealer.
*1 “Multi Projector Monitoring & Control Software” is included in the supplied CD-ROM.
Note
f If the synchronized projectors are not displayed in the list, check the following:
g Are there devices with the same IP address on the network?
g Are the LAN cables connected correctly? (x page 137)
g Are the subnets of the projectors the same?
g Are the same [LINK] settings applied to a group?
f Refer to [NETWORK SETUP] (x page 135) or “[Network cong] page” (x page 145) on how to change the projector name.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 115
Brightness control adjustment procedure example
The steps exemplify an adjustment to link the brightness of eight projectors connected in a network.
1) Connect all projectors to the hub using LAN cables. (x page 137)
2) Switch on all projectors and start projection.
3) Set [LAMP SELECT] to either [DUAL] or [SINGLE] for all projectors.
4) Set [MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [OFF], and select [APPLY], and then press the
<ENTER> button.
5) Set [SUBNET MASK] and [IP ADDRESS] in each projector.
f To be able to communicate over the network, set the same value in [SUBNET MASK] for all projectors and set a different value in [IP
ADDRESS] for each projector.
6) Wait for at least eight minutes after starting projection until the lamp brightness becomes steady.
7) Set all items in the [PICTURE] menu of all projectors to the same values.
8) Adjust [COLOR MATCHING] to match colors.
9) Display the internal test pattern “All white” in all projectors.
10) Set [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] to 100 % in all projectors.
11) Set [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] to 90 % in the projector with the least brightness.
12) Adjust [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] in each projector.
f Adjust [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] of all the other projectors so that the brightness is matched to the projector of which
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] is set to 90 %.
13) Set [MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [AUTO], and [LINK] to [GROUP A] in all projectors.
14) Select [APPLY] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] and press the <ENTER> button in all projectors.
f Brightness control starts.
Note
f Brightness is automatically corrected each time the lamp blinks when the power is switched on or off.
f Adjust brightness control again when lamp degradation causes increased variation in brightness or a lamp is replaced.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
116 - ENGLISH
[STANDBY MODE]
Set the power consumption during the standby.
1) Press as to select [STANDBY MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ECO] Use this setting to reduce power consumption during standby.
[NORMAL] Use this setting to use the network function during standby.
Note
f In the [ECO] setting, the network function, the <SERIAL OUT> terminal, and some RS-232C commands become inoperable during standby.
In the [NORMAL] setting, the network function and the <SERIAL OUT> terminal become operable during standby.
f When set to [ECO], it may take approx. 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on, compared with
when [NORMAL] is set.
[SCHEDULE]
Set the command execution schedule for each day of the week.
Enabling/disabling the schedule function
1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the schedule function.
[ON]
Enables the schedule function. Refer to “How to assign a program” (x page 116) or “How to set a
program” (x page 116) for how to set the schedule.
Note
f When [SCHEDULE] is set to [ON], the [STANDBY MODE] setting is forcibly switched to [NORMAL], and the setting cannot be changed.
Even if [SCHEDULE] is then set to [OFF] when in this state, the setting of [STANDBY MODE] remains at [NORMAL].
How to assign a program
1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].
2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3) Select and assign program to each day of week.
f Press as to select the day of week, and press qw to select a program number.
f You can set the program from No.1 to No.7. “- - -” indicates that the program number has not been set.
How to set a program
Set up to 16 commands to each program.
1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].
2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [PROGRAM EDIT].
4) Press qw to select a program number, and press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press as to select a command number, and press the <ENTER> button.
f You can change the page using qw.
6) Press asqw to select [TIME], and press the <ENTER> button.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 117
7) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a
time, and then press the <ENTER> button.
8) Press asqw to select [COMMAND].
9) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [COMMAND] detailed screen is displayed.
10) Press as to select a [COMMAND].
f For [COMMAND] which requires detailed settings, the items of the detailed settings will switch each time you press qw.
f When [INPUT] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press asqw to select the input to set.
[COMMAND]
Detailed settings of
[COMMAND]
Description
[POWER ON] Switches on the projector.
[STANDBY] Enters standby.
[SHUTTER]
[OPEN] Opens the shutter.
[CLOSE] Closes the shutter.
[INPUT]
[VIDEO] Switches the input to VIDEO.
[RGB1] Switches the input to RGB1.
[RGB2] Switches the input to RGB2.
[DVI-D] Switches the input to DVI-D.
[HDMI] Switches the input to HDMI.
[DIGITAL LINK] Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
[SDI]
*1
Switches the input to SDI.
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]
*2
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switch the input of the
Panasonic twisted-pair-cable transmitter to the specied input.
[LAMP SELECT]
[DUAL] Turns on two lamps.
[SINGLE]
Turns on one lamp. (The lamp with shorter runtime will
automatically light.)
[LAMP POWER]
[NORMAL] Sets the lamp brightness to high luminance.
[ECO] Sets the lamp brightness to low luminance.
[P IN P]
[OFF] P IN P function is not used.
[USER1] Lays out the sub-screen with the settings of [USER1].
[USER2] Lays out the sub-screen with the settings of [USER2].
[USER3] Lays out the sub-screen with the settings of [USER3].
*1 Only for PT-DZ870E
*2 When the Panasonic twisted-pair-cable transmitter (such as the optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G)) is connected to the
projector, its input name is reected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10] automatically. If an item where the input name is not reected is selected, it
is disabled.
11) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The command is xed and n is displayed at the left of the selected command.
f After the command is xed, press the <MENU> button to close the detailed setting screen.
12) Press asqw to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f If you attempt to register the setting that would make the lamp turn on for a short time, an error message will be displayed on the screen.
Set the time and command again.
f To delete a command already set, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control at the screen in Step 5), or select [DELETE] at the
screen in Step 6) and press the <ENTER> button.
f If multiple commands have been set for the same time, they are executed in chronological order starting from the smallest command
number.
f The operating time will be the local time. (x page 121)
f If an operation is executed with the remote control or control panel of the projector or with a control command before the command set in
[SCHEDULE] is executed, the command set with this function may not be executed.
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]
Set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection.
1) Press as to select [STARTUP INPUT SELECT].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] screen is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
118 - ENGLISH
3) Press asqw to select an input.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[LAST USED] Keeps the input selected last.
[VIDEO] Sets the input to VIDEO.
[RGB1] Sets the input to RGB1.
[RGB2] Sets the input to RGB2.
[DVI-D] Sets the input to DVI-D.
[HDMI] Sets the input to HDMI.
[DIGITAL LINK] Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK.
[SDI]
*1
Sets the input to SDI.
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]
*2
Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switch the input of Panasonic twisted-pair-cable transmitter to
the specied input.
*1 Only for PT-DZ870E
*2 When the Panasonic twisted-pair-cable transmitter (such as the optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G)) is connected to the
projector, its input name is reected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10] automatically. If an item where the input name is not reected is selected, it
is disabled.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
[RS-232C]
Set the communication conditions of the <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal.
Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL IN> terminal
1) Press as to select [RS-232C].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INPUT SELECT].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[PROJECTOR] Use the <SERIAL IN> terminal of the projector to execute RS-232C communication.
[DIGITAL INTERFACE BOX]
Executes RS-232C communication via the optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G)
and the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
5) Press as to select [(IN) BAUDRATE].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[9600]
Select the proper speed.[19200]
[38400]
7) Press as to select [(IN) PARITY].
8) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NONE]
Select the parity condition.[EVEN]
[ODD]
Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL OUT> terminal
1) Press as to select [RS-232C].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [(OUT) BAUDRATE].
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 119
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[9600]
Select the proper speed.[19200]
[38400]
5) Press as to select [(OUT) PARITY].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NONE]
Select the parity condition.[EVEN]
[ODD]
Setting the response
1) Press as to select [RS-232C].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID ALL)].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[ON] Returns the response when the ID setting is ALL.
[OFF] Does not return the response when the ID setting is ALL.
5) Press as to select [GROUP].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
[A] - [Z]
Controls multiple projectors simultaneously by sending the ID of RS-232C. You can set groups from
[A] to [Z]. The projector responds when the ID of RS-232C matches the setting.
7) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)].
8) Press qw to switch the item.
[ON] Returns the response when the ID setting is GROUP.
[OFF] Does not return the response when the ID setting is GROUP.
Note
f When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL INTERFACE BOX], communication using that serial terminal is available only when the
corresponding device (such as the optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G)) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN>
terminal.
f When transferring logos via the optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G), “NO SIGNAL SLEEP” of ET-YFB100G must be set
to “OFF” to avoid cutting off communication.
f When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL INTERFACE BOX], communication speed is xed to 9 600 bps.
[STATUS]
Display the status of the projector.
1) Press as to select [STATUS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [STATUS] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the pages.
f The page will change each time you press the button.
[INPUT] Displays the input terminal currently selected.
[SIGNAL NAME] Displays the input signal name.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
120 - ENGLISH
[SIGNAL FREQUENCY] Displays the frequency of the input signal.
[PROJECTOR RUNTIME] Displays the operation times of the projector.
[LAMP1]
*2
Displays the runtime and status of Lamp 1.
[LAMP2]
*2
Displays the runtime and status of Lamp 2.
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.] Displays the status of the air intake temperature of the projector.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMP.] Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector.
[AROUND LAMP TEMP.] Displays the status of the temperature around the lamps of the projector.
[PROJECTOR TYPE] Displays the type of the projector.
[SERIAL NUMBER] Displays the serial number of the projector.
[LAMP UNIT MODEL NO.] Displays the model no. of the lamp unit.
[LAMP1 SERIAL NUMBER] Displays the serial number of the lamp 1.
[LAMP2 SERIAL NUMBER] Displays the serial number of the lamp 2.
[MAIN VERSION] Displays the main version of the rmware of the projector.
[SUB VERSION] Displays the sub version of the rmware of the projector.
[UPGRADE(ET-UK20)]
*1
Displays the activation status based on the Upgrade Kit.
[ON COUNT]
[POWER ON TIMES] Displays the number of times the power is turned on.
[LAMP1 ON]
Displays the number of times the lamp is turned on.
[LAMP2 ON]
[SHUTTER] Displays the number of times the shutter is closed.
[LAMP1] Displays runtime in detail.
[LAMP2] Displays runtime in detail.
[NUMBER OF REGISTERED
SIGNAL]
Displays the number of registered signals.
[REMOTE2 STATUS] Displays the control status of the REMOTE2.
[AC VOLTAGE] Displays the status of the AC voltage.
[COOLING CONDITION] Displays the set cooling conditions. When [AUTO] is set, automatically recognized result is displayed.
[SIGNAL INFORMATION]
[MEMORY NO.] Displays the memory number of the input signal.
[INPUT] Displays the input terminal currently selected.
[SIGNAL NAME] Displays the input signal name.
[SIGNAL FREQUENCY] Displays the frequency of the input signal.
[SYNC.STATE] Displays the synch polarity of the input signal.
[V.SYNC WIDTH] Displays the vertical sync signal pulse width of the input signal.
[SCAN TYPE] Displays the scan type of the input signal.
[TOTAL DOTS] Displays the total dot count of the input signal.
[DISPLAY DOTS] Displays the number of input signal display dots.
[TOTAL LINES] Displays the total line count of the input signal.
[DISPLAY LINES] Displays the number of input signal display lines.
[SAMPLING] Displays the sampling information of the input signal.
[SIGNAL LEVEL] Displays the signal level of the input signal.
[BIT DEPTH]
*1
Displays the gradation of the input signal.
*1 Only for PT-DZ870E
*2 The lamp runtime to be displayed is real time. The following conversion is required to calculate the rough estimate for lamp replacement.
Formula for lamp replacement time (rough estimate)
(A x 4 + B x 3) ÷ 4
f A: Runtime when [LAMP POWER] is set to [NORMAL]
f B: Runtime when [LAMP POWER] is set to [ECO]
Note
f The content of status can be sent via E-mail by pressing the <ENTER> button while displaying the [STATUS] screen.
f Some items in [SIGNAL INFORMATION] may be displayed and others not displayed, depending on the signal being input.
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
A function that automatically switches the power source of the projector to standby if there is no input signal for a certain period of time. The
time before switching to standby can be set.
1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 121
[DISABLE] Disables the No signal shut-off function.
[10MIN.] - [90MIN.] Allows you to set in ten minutes intervals.
[REMOTE2 MODE]
You can set the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
1) Press as to select [REMOTE2 MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT]
The pin assignment of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal is used by the factory default setting of the
projector.
[USER] Used to change the setting of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
[L6500 SERIES] The setting of <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal is used for the L6500 series compatibility.
f When [USER] is selected, proceed to Step 3).
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
4) Press as to select one from [PIN2] to [PIN8], and press qw to switch the setting.
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
Set the functions of the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.
1) Press as to select [FUNCTION BUTTON].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a function.
[DISABLE] Disables the <FUNCTION> button.
[P IN P]
Switches the [P IN P] setting to [OFF], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3]. (x page 124)
[SUB MEMORY]
Displays the sub memory list. (x page 129)
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
Switches the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] setting. (x page 76)
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
Switches the [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] setting. (x page 74)
[FREEZE]
Temporarily pauses the image. (x page 105)
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Displays the waveform of the input signal. (x page 105)
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
Switches the ip horizontal settings. (x page 92)
[ASPECT]
Switches the aspect setting. (x page 78)
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
[DATE AND TIME]
Set the time zone, date, and time of the built-in clock of the projector.
Setting the time zone
1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [TIME ZONE].
4) Press qw to switch [TIME ZONE].
Setting the date and time manually
1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
122 - ENGLISH
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select an item, and press qw to set the local date and time.
6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The setting of the date and time will be completed.
Setting the date and time automatically
1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION], and press qw to change the setting to [ON].
6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The setting of the date and time will be completed.
Note
f To set the date and time automatically, the projector must be connected to the network.
f If synchronization with the NTP server fails just after [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is turned [ON], or if [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is turned
[ON] while the NTP server is not set, [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to [OFF].
f Access the projector via a web browser to set the NTP server. Refer to “[Adjust clock] page” (x page 146) for details.
[LENS CALIBRATION]
Automatically set the lens shift limit values and home position for the projector.
1) Press as to select [LENS CALIBRATION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f To cancel, select [CANCEL].
f The lens moves up, down, left, and right to automatically set the lens shift limit values and home position.
f The lens stops to complete the calibration.
Note
f [PROGRESS] is displayed on the menu during lens calibration. Cannot cancel mid-operation.
f When lens calibration executes correctly, [COMPLETE] is displayed and [INCOMPLETE] is displayed when it does not execute correctly.
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]
Save the various setting values as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press as to select [SAVE ALL USER DATA].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
4) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f [PROGRESS] is displayed while saving data.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 123
Note
f Data set from the computer application is not included in [ALL USER DATA].
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]
Load the various setting values saved as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press as to select [LOAD ALL USER DATA].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
4) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The projector will go into the standby status to reect the setting values when [LOAD ALL USER DATA] is executed.
f Data registered from a computer is not included in [ALL USER DATA].
[INITIALIZE]
Return various setting values to their factory default settings.
1) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select an item to initialize.
[ALL USER DATA]
Returns all setting items including [REGISTERED SIGNAL], [NETWORK SETUP], [E-mail set up],
and [USER LOGO] to the factory default settings.
The projector will go into the standby status to reect the setting values.
[REGISTERED SIGNAL]
Deletes all the setting values saved for each input signal.
To delete only a part of a registered signal, perform the procedure described in “Deleting the
registered signal” (x page 127).
[NETWORK/E-MAIL] Returns [NETWORK SETUP] and [E-mail set up] to factory default settings.
[LOGO IMAGE] Deletes the image registered in [USER LOGO].
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
6) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
This function is used by a service person.
Chapter 4Settings — [P IN P] menu
124 - ENGLISH
[P IN P] menu
On the menu screen, select [P IN P] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f After selecting the item, press asqw to set.
Using P IN P function
Locate a separate, small sub screen in the main screen to project two images simultaneously.
1) Press as to select [P IN P MODE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a function.
[OFF] P IN P function is not used.
[USER1]
The items set in “Setting P IN P function” (x page 124) are used in P IN P function.
[USER2]
[USER3]
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
Setting P IN P function
P IN P function settings can be saved to [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3].
1) Press as to select [P IN P MODE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select the desired mode from [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3], and press the <ENTER>
button.
4) Press as to select [MAIN WINDOW] or [SUB WINDOW], and press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press as to select the input terminal to be displayed in the window, and press the <ENTER> button.
6) Press as to select an item.
[SIZE] Set the window display size between 10 % and 100 %.
[POSITION] Set the display position of the window within the screen.
[CLOCK PHASE]
When the sub window is input from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal and a
ickering image or smeared outline appears, set between 0 and +31.
7) If [SIZE] is selected in Step 6), press the <ENTER> button.
f The sub-menu is displayed.
8) Press as to select an item.
9) Press qw to make adjustment, and press the <MENU> button.
10) If [POSITION] is selected in Step 6), press the <ENTER> button.
11) Press asqw to adjust the position, and press the <MENU> button.
12) If [CLOCK PHASE] is selected in Step 6), press qw to make adjustment.
13) Press as to select [FRAME LOCK].
Chapter 4Settings — [P IN P] menu
ENGLISH - 125
14) Press qw to switch the item.
[MAIN WINDOW] Set frame lock to the input signal set in the main window.
[SUB WINDOW] Set frame lock to the input signal set in the sub window.
15) Press as to select [TYPE].
16) Press qw to switch the item.
[MAIN WINDOW] The main window has display priority.
[SUB WINDOW] The sub window has display priority.
Note
f The P IN P function may not be available for some signals being input or terminals being selected. Refer to “Two-window display
combination list” (x page 177) for details.
f The main window setting values are applied to image adjustment values such as [PICTURE MODE], [GAMMA], and [COLOR
TEMPERATURE].
f On the main screen (when no menu is displayed), press qw to switch the sizes and positions of the main window and sub window while P
IN P is operating.
f When [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to other than [NORMAL], [P IN P] cannot be set.
f 3D images cannot be displayed in P IN P.
f The P IN P state continues while the P IN P function is used, even if 3D images of the simultaneous system are displayed.
f The combination of DIGITAL LINK and other input cannot be displayed in P IN P.
Chapter 4Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu
126 - ENGLISH
[TEST PATTERN] menu
On the menu screen, select [TEST PATTERN] from the main menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f Press qw to switch.
[TEST PATTERN]
Display the test pattern built-in to the projector.
Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input signal before performing various
adjustments.
1) Press qw to switch the [TEST PATTERN] item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
Menu screen + All white
Displays test patterns with the menu screen. Select a test pattern so that it is easy to make various
adjustments.
Menu screen + All black
Menu screen + Window
Menu screen + Window
(inversion)
Menu screen + Color bar
(vertical)
Menu screen + Color bar
(horizontal)
Menu screen + 16:9/4:3
aspect frame
Menu screen + Focus
Menu screen + Entry screen
Displays the menu screen and input signal.
Built-in test patterns are not displayed.
Note
f Press the <ON SCREEN> button on the remote control while the test pattern is displayed to hide the menu screen.
Changing color or a focus test pattern
When the “Menu Screen + Focus” test pattern is displayed, the color can be changed.
1) Press qw to select the “Menu Screen + Focus” test pattern.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a color, and press the <ENTER> button.
f The test pattern color changed to the color selected.
Note
f The test pattern color settings return to [WHITE] when the projector is switched off.
f Colors of the test patterns other than focus test patterns cannot be changed.
Chapter 4Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
ENGLISH - 127
[SIGNAL LIST] menu
On the menu screen, select [SIGNAL LIST] from the main menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
r Registered signal details
A1 (1-2)
When the address number (A1, A2, ... L7, L8) signal is registered
Sub memory number
Memory number:
f A name can be set for each sub memory (x page 129).
Registering new signals
After a new signal is input and the <MENU> button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed, the registration is completed and the
[MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
Note
f Up to 96 signals, including sub memories, can be registered to the projector.
f There are 12 pages (eight memories of A through L, with eight memories possible on each page) for memory numbers, and the signal is
registered to the lowest number that is available. If there is no available memory number it will be overwritten from the oldest signal.
f The names to be registered are automatically determined by the input signals and memory numbers.
f If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will be registered at the instant they are input.
Renaming the registered signal
Registered signals can be renamed.
1) Press asqw to select the signal of which name is to be changed.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
f The memory number, input terminal, input signal name, frequency, synch polarity, etc., are displayed.
f Press the <MENU> button to return to the [SIGNAL LIST] screen.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE].
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
6) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
7) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The registration is completed and the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen returns.
f When pressing asqw to select [CANCEL] and pressing the <ENTER> button, the changed signal name will not be registered and
an automatically registered signal name will be used.
Deleting the registered signal
Registered signals can be deleted.
1) Press asqw to select the signal to delete.
Chapter 4Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
128 - ENGLISH
2) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The selected signal will be deleted.
Note
f A registered signal can also be deleted from [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] on the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen.
Protecting the registered signal
1) Press asqw to select the signal to protect.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [LOCK].
5) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] The signal is not protected.
[ON] The signal is protected.
Note
f When [LOCK] is set to [ON], signal deletion, image adjustment, and automatic setup are not available. To perform these operations, set
[LOCK] to [OFF].
f A signal can be registered to the sub memory even if it is protected.
f Even a protected signal will be deleted if [INITIALIZE] is executed.
Expanding signal lock-in range
1) Press asqw to select the signal to set.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [LOCK-IN RANGE].
5) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NARROW] Select in most cases.
[WIDE] Widens the lock-in range.
Note
f Switch the range that determines that a signal to be input is the same signal that is already registered.
f To prioritize the determination that it is the same signal that is already registered, set to the [WIDE] setting.
f Use in cases such as when the synchronizing frequency of a signal to be input has changed slightly, or multiple signal lists are registered.
f Can only be used when a signal is input from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal, <RGB 2 IN> terminal, <DVI-D IN> terminal, <HDMI IN> terminal, or
<DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
f When [WIDE] is set, the image may appear distorted because a signal is determined to be the same signal even if a synchronizing
frequency changes slightly.
f When a signal to be input corresponds to multiple signals set in [WIDE], a registered signal with a high memory number receives priority.
Example: a signal to be input that corresponds to memory numbers A2, A4, and B1 will be determined to be B1.
f When a registration signal is deleted, the settings are also deleted.
f In an environment where multiple types of signals are input to the same terminal, signals are sometimes not determined correctly when the
setting is set to [WIDE].
Chapter 4Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
ENGLISH - 129
Sub memory
The projector has a sub memory function that can register the multiple image adjustment data, even if it is recognized as the same signal by
the frequency or format of the synchronization signal source.
Use this function when you need to adjust the picture quality such as switching of the aspect ratio or white balance by the same
synchronization signal source. The sub memory includes all the data that can be adjusted for each signal, such as the screen aspect ratio and
data adjusted in the [PICTURE] item ([CONTRAST], [BRIGHTNESS], etc.).
Registering to the sub memory
1) Press qw on the normal screen (when the menu is not displayed).
f The sub memory registration screen is displayed if the sub memory is not registered. Proceed to Step 3).
f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
f By selecting [SUB MEMORY] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [FUNCTION BUTTON], the <FUNCTION> button on the remote
control can be used instead of qw.
2) Press asqw to select the sub memory number to register in [SUB MEMORY LIST].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f To rename the registered signal, follow the procedure in Steps 6) and 7) in “Renaming the registered signal” (x page 127).
Switching to the sub memory
1) Press qw on the normal screen (when the menu is not displayed).
f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
2) Press asqw to select the signal to switch in [SUB MEMORY LIST].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f This switches to the signal selected in Step 2).
Deleting the sub memory
1) Press qw on the normal screen (when the menu is not displayed).
f The [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen is displayed.
2) Press asqw to select the sub memory to delete, and press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote
control.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The selected sub memory will be deleted.
Chapter 4Settings — [SECURITY] menu
130 - ENGLISH
[SECURITY] menu
On the menu screen, select [SECURITY] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f When the projector is used for the rst time
Initial password: Press awsqawsq in order, and press the <ENTER> button.
f After selecting the item, press asqw to set.
Attention
f When you select the [SECURITY] menu and press the <ENTER> button, entering a password is required. Enter the preset password and
then continue operations of the [SECURITY] menu.
f When the password has been changed previously, enter the changed password, and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The entered password is displayed with*marks on the screen.
f An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the correct password.
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed when the power is turned on. When the entered password is incorrect, the operation will be
restricted to the power standby <v> button, the <SHUTTER> button, and the <LENS> (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, and <SHIFT>) buttons.
1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the security password entry.
[ON] Enables the security password entry.
Note
f In the factory default setting of after [ALL USER DATA] in [INITIALIZE] (x page 123) is executed, the [SECURITY PASSWORD] setting is
set to [OFF].
f Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
f The security password is enabled after setting [SECURITY PASSWORD] to [ON] and turning the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>.
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]
Change the security password.
1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw and the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set the password.
f Up to eight button operations can be set.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
5) Re-enter the password for the confirmation.
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The entered password is displayed with*marks on the screen.
f An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the correct password.
Chapter 4Settings — [SECURITY] menu
ENGLISH - 131
[DISPLAY SETTING]
Overlap the security message (text or image) over the projecting image.
1) Press as to select [DISPLAY SETTING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] The text display is disabled.
[TEXT] The text display is enabled.
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
Note
f To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
[TEXT CHANGE]
Change the text displayed when the text display is enabled by selecting [TEXT] in [DISPLAY SETTING].
1) Press as to select [TEXT CHANGE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [TEXT CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The text is changed.
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
Enable/disable the button operations on the control panel and the remote control.
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
[CONTROL PANEL] You can set the limitation on the control from the control panel.
[REMOTE CONTROL] You can set the limitation on the control from the remote control.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f You can set the operation restriction from the control panel or the remote control.
[ENABLE] Enables all button operations.
[DISABLE] Disables all button operations.
[USER]
Operation of all buttons can be enabled/disabled separately.
Refer to “Enabling/disabling any button” (x page 131) for details.
7) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
8) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Enabling/disabling any button
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
Chapter 4Settings — [SECURITY] menu
132 - ENGLISH
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
6) Press qw to switch [USER].
7) Press as to select the button item to set.
f When [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press as to select the button to set.
Buttons that can be set
[CONTROL PANEL] [REMOTE CONTROL]
[POWER BUTTON]
Power standby <v> button, power on <b> button
[INPUT SELECT BUTTON]
<VIDEO> button, <RGB1/RGB2> button, or <RGB1/2> button, <DVI-D> button, <HDMI> button,
<DIGITAL LINK> button, and <SDI> button
*1
[MENU BUTTON] <MENU> button
[LENS BUTTON] <LENS> button Lens (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) button
[AUTO SETUP BUTTON] <AUTO SETUP> button
[SHUTTER BUTTON] <SHUTTER> button
[ON SCREEN BUTTON] <ON SCREEN> button
[OTHER BUTTON]
asqw, <ENTER> button
Buttons not listed above
*1 Only for PT-DZ870E
8) Press qw to switch the item.
[ENABLE] Enables button operations.
[DISABLE] Disables button operations.
f The following items are available only when [RGB1/2 BUTTON] of [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected.
[TOGGLE] Switches between RGB1 and RGB2 when the button is operated.
[RGB1] Fixes to RGB1.
[RGB2] Fixes to RGB2.
[DISABLE] Disables button operations.
f When [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in Step 7), and after the item is switched, press the <MENU> button to return to the
[CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen.
9) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f When a button operation is performed on the device set to [DISABLE], the [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
Enter the control device password.
f The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen will disappear when there is no operation for approx. 10 seconds.
f If the operations of both [CONTROL PANEL] and [REMOTE CONTROL] are set to [DISABLE], the projector cannot be turned off (cannot
enter standby).
f When the setting has completed, the menu screen will disappear. To operate continuously, press the <MENU> button to display the main
menu.
f Even when button operation on the remote control is disabled, operation of the <ID SET> button on the remote control is enabled.
Chapter 4Settings — [SECURITY] menu
ENGLISH - 133
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
The control device password can be changed.
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f To cancel, select [CANCEL].
Attention
f The initial password is “AAAA” by the factory default or when [ALL USER DATA] in [INITIALIZE] (x page 123) is executed.
f Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
134 - ENGLISH
[NETWORK] menu
On the menu screen, select [NETWORK] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.
f After selecting the item, press asqw to set.
[DIGITAL LINK MODE]
Switch the communication method of the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal of the projector.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO] Switches the communication method automatically to DIGITAL LINK or Ethernet.
[DIGITAL LINK] Fixes the communication method to DIGITAL LINK.
[ETHERNET] Fixes the communication method to Ethernet.
Possible communication modes
Setting
Communication possible
Image transmission Ethernet RS-232C
[AUTO]
For DIGITAL LINK
l l l
For Ethernet
l
[DIGITAL LINK]
l l l
[ETHERNET]
l
l: Communication possible
―: Communication not possible
[DIGITAL LINK SETUP]
Set the communication method of DIGITAL LINK.
When the projector is connected directly via Ethernet
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [DUPLEX(ETHERNET)].
4) Press qw to switch the communication method.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTONEGOTIATION] The communication method is set automatically.
[100BaseTX-Full] Full duplex communication method is set.
[100BaseTX-Half] Half-duplex communication method is set.
5) Press as to select [STORE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 135
7) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The projector does not support 10BaseT Full/Half.
When the projector is connected to a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [DUPLEX(DIGITAL LINK)].
4) Press qw to switch the communication method.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[100BaseTX-Full] Full duplex communication method is set.
[100BaseTX-Half] Half-duplex communication method is set.
[AUTONEGOTIATION] The communication method is set automatically.
5) Press as to select [STORE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
7) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]
Display DIGITAL LINK connection environment.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK STATUS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] screen is displayed.
[LINK STATUS] Either [NO LINK], [DIGITAL LINK], or [ETHERNET] is displayed.
[HDCP STATUS] Either [NO SIGNAL], [OFF], or [ON] is displayed.
[SIGNAL QUALITY]
[SIGNAL QUALITY] is a numerical value of the amount of error, and the display color changes to
green, yellow, or red depending on that value.
Check the signal quality level while receiving a signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
f MAX/MIN: Maximum/minimum value of the amount of error.
f Green (
-
12 dB or lower) Normal signal quality level.
f Yellow (
-
11 to
-
8 dB) Warning level where there is the possibility of noise introduced on the
screen.
f Red (
-
7 dB or higher) Abnormal level where synchronization may be interrupted, or a signal may
not be received.
[NETWORK SETUP]
Perform the initial setting of the network before using the network function.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [NETWORK SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select an item, and change the settings according to the operation instructions of the
menu.
[PROJECTOR NAME] Change the setting when using a DHCP server.
[DHCP]
Set to [ON] when obtaining an IP address automatically using a DHCP server. Set to [OFF] when not
using a DHCP server.
[IP ADDRESS] Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server.
[SUBNET MASK] Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server.
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP server.
[STORE] Save the current network settings.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
136 - ENGLISH
4) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
5) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f When using a DHCP server, conrm that the DHCP server is running.
f Consult your network administrator regarding the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
[NETWORK CONTROL]
Set up the control method of the network.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK CONTROL].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [NETWORK CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select an item, and press qw to change the setting.
[WEB CONTROL] Set to [ON] to control with the web browser.
[PJLink CONTROL] Set to [ON] to control with the PJLink protocol.
[COMMAND CONTROL]
Set to [ON] to control with the <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal control command format
(x page 175). Refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 170).
[COMMAND PORT] Set the port number used for command control.
[CRESTRON RoomView] Set to [ON] to control with RoomView of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
[AMX D.D.]
Set to [ON] to control with the controller of AMX Corporation.
Setting this function to [ON] enables detection through “AMX Device Discovery”. For details, refer to
the website of AMX Corporation.
URL http://www.amx.com/
[EXTRON XTP]
Set to [ON] when connecting the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN>
terminal.
The [EXTRON XTP] setting must be set to [OFF] when connecting the optional Digital Interface Box
(Model No.: ET-YFB100G).
For details of the “XTP transmitter”, refer to the website of Extron Electronics.
URL http://www.extron.com/
[STORE] Save the current network control settings.
4) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
5) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
[NETWORK STATUS]
Display the status of the projector network.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.
[DIGITAL INTERFACE BOX]
When the optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal, the main menu of
ET-YFB100G is displayed. Refer to the Operating Instructions of ET-YFB100G for details.
Note
f When [EXTRON XTP] is set to [ON], [DIGITAL INTERFACE BOX] cannot be selected.
f The operation guidance for the “RETURN” button is displayed on the menu screen of the Digital Interface Box. The projector does not have
the “RETURN” button, but same operation is available with the <MENU> button.
[Art-Net SETUP]
Settings to use the Art-Net function is executed.
1) Press as to select [Art-Net SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [Art-Net SETUP] screen is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 137
3) Press as to select an item.
[Art-Net] Sets to [ON] when the Art-Net function is used. Sets to [OFF] when the Art-Net function is not used.
[PORT ADDRESS] Inputs a port address that the projector processes Art-Net.
[START ADDRESS] Inputs a start address that the projector processes Art-Net.
4) Press qw to switch the setting.
5) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
6) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Network connections
The projector has a network function, and the following operations are available from the computer using the web control.
f Setting and adjustment of the projector
f Display of the projector status
f Sending of E-mail messages when there is a problem with the projector
The projector supports “Crestron RoomView”, and the following application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc. can be used.
f RoomView Express
f Fusion RV
f RoomView Server Edition
Attention
f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
Note
f “Crestron RoomView” is a system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. that collectively manages and controls devices on multiple systems
connected to a network using a computer.
f For details of “Crestron RoomView”, refer to the website of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (English only)
URL http://www.crestron.com
To download “RoomView Express”, go to the following website of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (English only)
URL http://www.crestron.com/getroomview
f A LAN cable is required to use the network function.
r Example of a normal network connection
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)
Hub
f A web browser is required to use this function. Conrm that the web browser can be used beforehand.
Compatible OS: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8, Mac OS X v10.4/v10.5/v10.6/v10.7/v10.8
Compatible browser: Internet Explorer 7.0/8.0/9.0/10.0, Safari 4.0/5.0/6.0 (Mac OS)
f Communication with an E-mail server is required to use the E-mail function. Conrm that the E-mail can be used beforehand.
f Use a LAN cable that is compatible with category 5 or higher.
f Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter.
Connecting to a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
The projector has a function that can receive Ethernet signals from a twisted-pair-cable transmitter together with video and audio signals via a
LAN cable. Connect a LAN cable to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal of the projector. (x pages 18, 28)
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
138 - ENGLISH
r Example of network connections via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)LAN cable (straight)
Twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Hub
f For the LAN cable between a twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
g Compatible with CAT5e or higher
g Shielded type (including connectors)
g Straight-through
g Single wire
f The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1"). If this distance is
exceeded, image may be disrupted and may cause a malfunction in LAN communication.
f When laying cables between a twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, check that cable characteristics are compatible with CAT5e
or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When using a relay connector midway, include it in the measurement.
f Do not use a hub between a twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
f Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
f To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
f Lay the cables between a twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
f When installing multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
f After laying the cables, conrm that the value of [SIGNAL QUALITY] in the [NETWORK] menu [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] is displayed in
green (indicates normal quality). (x page 135)
f For twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturers of which the operation has been veried with the DIGITAL LINK compatible
projector, refer to Panasonic website (http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/). Note that the verication for devices of other manufacturers
has been made for the items set by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been veried. For operation or performance
problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
Accessing from the web browser
1) Start up the web browser on the computer.
2) Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry field of the web browser.
3) Enter the user name and the password.
f The factory default setting of the user name is user1 (user rights)/admin1 (administrator rights) and the password is panasonic (lower
case).
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 139
4) Click OK.
f The [Projector status] page is displayed.
Note
f If you use a web browser to control the projector, set [WEB CONTROL] to [ON] in [NETWORK CONTROL] (x page 136).
f Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers. Do not set or control the projector from multiple
computers.
f Change the password rst. (x page 152)
f The administrator rights allow use of all functions. The user rights allow use of [Projector status] (x page 140), conrmation of the error
information page (x page 141), [Network status] (x page 142), [Basic control] (x page 143), and [Change password] (x page 152)
only.
f Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively.
f Some items on the projector setting page use the Javascript function of the web browser. The projector may not be able to be controlled
properly if it is set with a browser that does not have this function enabled.
f If the screen for the web control is not displayed, consult your network administrator.
f While updating the screen for the web control, the screen may become white for a moment, but it is not a malfunction.
Descriptions of items
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Page tab
Switches pages by clicking this item.
2 [Status]
The status of the projector is displayed by clicking this item.
3 [Projector control]
The [Projector control] page is displayed by clicking this item.
4 [Detailed set up]
The [Detailed set up] page is displayed by clicking this item.
5 [Change password]
The [Change password] page is displayed by clicking this item.
6 [CRESTRON RoomView]
The control page of RoomView is displayed by clicking this item.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
140 - ENGLISH
[Projector status] page
Click [Status] [Projector status].
Display the status of the projector for the following items.
13
14
15
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
16
9
5
10
11
12
1 [PROJECTOR TYPE]
Displays the type of the projector.
2 [MAIN VERSION]
Displays the rmware version of the projector.
3 [POWER]
Displays the status of the power.
4 [SHUTTER]
Displays the status of the shutter (ON: closed, OFF: open).
5 [LAMP SELECT]
Displays the setting status of [LAMP SELECT] (x page 109).
6 [SERIAL NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the projector.
7 [REMOTE2 STATUS]
Displays the control status of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
8 [OSD]
Displays the status of the on-screen display.
9 [LAMP POWER]
Displays the setting status of [LAMP POWER] (x page 111).
10 [INPUT]
Displays the status of the selected input.
11 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the air intake temperature of the projector.
12 [OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector.
13 [AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the temperature around the lamp of the
projector.
14 [LAMP1], [LAMP2], [RUNTIME]
Displays the status and the runtime (converted value) of the
lamp.
15 [SELF TEST]
Displays the self-diagnosis information.
16 [PROJECTOR RUNTIME]
Displays the runtime of the projector.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 141
Error information page
When [Error (Detail)] or [Warning (Detail)] is displayed in the self-diagnosis display of the [Projector status] screen, click it to display the
error/warning details.
f The projector may go into the standby status to protect the projector depending on the contents of the error.
1
1 Self-diagnosis result display
Displays the item check results.
[OK]:
Indicates that operation is normal.
[FAILED]:
Indicates that there is a problem.
[WARNING]:
Indicates that there is a warning.
r [FAILED] items
Parameter Description
[MAIN CPU BUS] There is a problem with the microcomputer circuitry. Consult your dealer.
[FAN] There is a problem with the fan or the fan drive circuit. Consult your dealer.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
The air intake temperature is too high. The projector may be used in an environment
where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]
The temperature around the optics module inside the projector is high. The projector
may be used in an environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating
appliance.
[AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE] The temperature around the lamp is high. The air exhaust port may be blocked.
[LAMP1 REMAIN TIME] The runtime of the lamp has exceeded the specied time, and it is time to replace the
lamp.
[LAMP2 REMAIN TIME]
[LAMP1 STATUS] The lamp has failed to turn on. Wait a while until the luminous lamp cools off, and then
turn on the power.
[LAMP2 STATUS]
[APERTURE(CONTRAST-SHUTTER)] There is a problem in the contrast shutter circuit for dynamic iris. Consult your dealer.
[SHUTTER(MUTE-SHUTTER)] There is a problem with the shutter circuitry. Consult your dealer.
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect intake temperature. Consult your
dealer.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect temperature inside the projector.
Consult your dealer.
[AROUND LAMP TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect exhaust air temperature. Consult your
dealer.
[BATTERY] Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.
[COLOR WHEEL]
There is a problem with the color wheel or the color wheel drive circuit. Consult your
dealer.
[LENS MOUNTER] There is a problem in the lens mounter. Consult your dealer.
[COVER OPEN]
Installation of the lamp unit cover is incomplete. Check the installation of the lamp unit
cover. (x page 162)
[BRIGHTNESS SENSOR]
There is a problem with the luminance sensor. If problems persist even after switching
on the power, consult your dealer.
[ANGLE SENSOR] There is a problem with the sensor that detects angle. Consult your dealer.
[AIR FILTER CASE]
The air lter case is not attached. Check the attachment of the air lter unit.
(x page 160)
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
142 - ENGLISH
Parameter Description
[AIR FILTER]
There is too much dust accumulated in the air lter. Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch
<OFF> (x page 57), and clean the air lter. (x page 160)
r [WARNING] items
Parameter Description
[AC POWER]
AC input voltage is weak. Use electric wiring that can sufciently withstand the power
consumption of the projector.
[LOW-TEMPERATURE]
The temperature around the optics module inside the projector is low. Projection cannot
be started until the optics module becomes warm.
[HORIZONTAL TILT] The projector is used tilting at an angle that exceeds 15° from the horizontal plane.
[LIGHT OUTPUT LIMIT]
The projector may be used in an environment where the temperature is high. The light
output is reduced by approx. 20 % to protect the projector.
[Network status] page
Click [Status] [Network status].
The current network setting status is displayed.
[Access error log] page
Click [Status] [Access error log].
The error log on the web server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with unauthorized user names or
passwords.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 143
[Mail error log] page
Click [Status] [Mail error log].
Display E-mail error information if failed to send periodic E-mails.
Note
f [Access error log] and [Mail error log] display the recent few thousand accesses/requests. All information may not be displayed when many
accesses/requests are made at one time.
f When [Access error log] and [Mail error log] exceeds a certain amount, older information is erased.
f Check [Access error log] and [Mail error log] periodically.
[Basic control] page
Click [Projector control] [Basic control].
6
1
2
3
4
5
1 [POWER]
Turns on/off the power.
2 [SHUTTER]
Switches the setting whether to use the shutter function
(closing/opening of the shutter).
3 [OSD]
Switches on (display)/off (hide) the on-screen display function.
4 [SYSTEM]
Switches the system method.
5 On-screen display of the projector
Displays the same items as shown on the on-screen display
of the projector. You can check or change the settings of the
menus. It is displayed even if the on-screen display function is
set to off (hide).
6 [INPUT SELECT]
Switches the input signal.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
144 - ENGLISH
[Detail control] page
Click [Projector control] [Detail control].
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
1 Control of the projector
The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in the same
way as the buttons on the remote control. After control, the on-
screen display of the projector at the right of the control page is
updated.
2 [SUB MEMORY]
Switches the sub memory.
3 [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
Switches to system daylight view settings.
4 [FREEZE]
Temporarily pauses the image.
5 [P IN P]
Switches the P IN P setting.
6 [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
Switches the ip horizontal settings.
7 [WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Displays the waveform of the input signal.
8 [LENS]
Adjusts the projection lens.
9 [TEST PATTERN]
Displays the test pattern.
10 [GET OSD]
Updates the on-screen display of the projector at the right of the
control page.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 145
[Network cong] page
Click [Detailed set up] [Network cong].
f Click [Network cong] to display the [CAUTION!] screen.
f The current settings are displayed by pressing the [Next] button.
f Click [Change] to display the setting change screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 [PROJECTOR NAME]
Enter the name of the projector. Enter the host name if it is
required when using a DHCP server etc.
2 [DHCP ON], [DHCP OFF]
To enable the DHCP client function, set to [DHCP ON].
3 [IP ADDRESS]
Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server.
4 [SUBNET MASK]
Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server.
5 [DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP
server.
6 [DNS1]
Enter the DNS1 server address.
Permissible characters for the entry of DNS1 server address
(primary):
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)
(Example: 192.168.0.253)
7 [DNS2]
Enter the DNS2 server address.
Available characters for the entry of DNS2 server address
(secondary):
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)
(Example: 192.168.0.254)
8 [Back], [Next]
Click the [Back] button to return to the original screen. The
current settings are displayed by pressing the [Next] button.
Click the [Submit] button to update the settings.
Note
f When you use the “Forward” and “Back” functions of your browser, a warning message “Page has Expired” may appear. In that case, click
[Network cong] again since the following operation will not be guaranteed.
f Changing LAN settings while connected to the LAN may cause the connection to cut out.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
146 - ENGLISH
[Adjust clock] page
Click [Detailed set up] [Adjust clock].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 [Time Zone]
Select the time zone.
2 [Set time zone]
Updates the time zone setting.
3 [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION]
Set to [ON] to adjust the date and time automatically.
4 [NTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP server when
you set to adjust the date and time manually.
(To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.)
5 [Date]
Enter the date to be changed.
6 [Time]
Enter the time to be changed.
7 [Submit]
Updates the date and time settings.
Note
f The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult
your dealer.
[Ping test] page
Check whether the network is connected to the E-mail server, POP server, DNS server, etc.
Click [Detailed set up] [Ping test].
1
2
3
4
1 [Input IP address]
Enter the IP address of the server to be tested.
2 [Submit]
Executes the connection test.
3 Example of display when the connection has succeeded
4 Example of display when the connection has failed
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 147
[E-mail set up] page
When there is a problem or the runtime of a lamp reaches a set value, an E-mail can be sent to preset E-mail addresses (up to two
addresses).
Click [Detailed set up] [E-mail set up].
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 [ENABLE]
Select [ENABLE] to use the E-mail function.
2 [SMTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or the server name of the E-mail server
(SMTP). To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be
set up.
3 [MAIL FROM]
Enter the E-mail address of the projector. (Up to 63 characters
in single byte)
4 [MEMO]
Enter information such as the location of the projector that
noties the sender of the E-mail. (Up to 63 characters in single
byte)
5 [MINIMUM TIME]
Change the minimum interval for the temperature warning
E-mail. The default value is 60 minutes. In this case, another
E-mail will not be sent for 60 minutes after sending the
temperature warning E-mail even if it reaches the warning
temperature.
6 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Change the temperature setting for the temperature warning
mail. A temperature warning E-mail is sent when the
temperature exceeds this value.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
148 - ENGLISH
8
7
8
7
9
7 [E-MAIL ADDRESS 1], [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2]
Enter the E-mail address to be sent. Leave [E-MAIL ADDRESS
2] blank when two E-mail addresses are not to be used.
8 Settings of the conditions to send E-mail
Select the conditions to send E-mail.
[MAIL CONTENTS]:
Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE].
[ERROR]:
Send an E-mail when an error occurred in the self-diagnosis.
[LAMP1 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining lamp on time for
the lamp 1 has reached the value set at the right eld.
[LAMP2 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining lamp on time for
the lamp 2 has reached the value set at the right eld.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]:
Send an E-mail when the air intake temperature has reached
the value set at the above eld.
[PERIODIC REPORT]:
Place a check mark on this to send an E-mail periodically.
It will be sent on the days and time with the check mark.
9 [Submit]
Update the settings.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 149
[Authentication set up] page
Set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send an E-mail.
Click [Detailed set up] [Authentication set up].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 [Auth]
Select the authentication method specied by your Internet
service provider.
2 [SMTP Auth]
Set when the SMTP authentication is selected.
3 [POP server name]
Enter the POP server name.
Allowed characters:
Alphanumerics (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9)
Minus sign (-) and period (.)
4 [User name]
Enter the user name for the POP server or the SMTP server.
5 [Password]
Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP server.
6 [SMTP server port]
Enter the port number of the SMTP server.
(Normally 25)
7 [POP server port]
Enter the port number of the POP server.
(Normally 110)
8 [Submit]
Update the settings.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
150 - ENGLISH
Contents of E-mail sent
Example of E-mail sent when E-mail is set
The following E-mail is sent when the E-mail settings have been established.
=== Panasonic projector report (CO NFIG URE) ===
Projector T ype : DZ870
Serial No : SH1234567
----- E-mail setup data -----
TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP
MINIMUM TIME at [ 60] minut es interval
INTAKE AI R T EMPERATURE Over [ 46 degC / 114 degF ]
ERROR [ O FF ]
LAMP1 RUNTIME [ OFF ] at REMAIN [ 400] H
LAMP1 RUNTIME [ OFF ] at REMAIN [ 200] H
LAMP2 RUNTIME [ OFF ] at REMAIN [ 400] H
LAMP2 RUNTIME [ OFF ] at REMAIN [ 200] H
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ OFF ]
PERIODI C REPORT
Sunday [ OFF ] Monday [ OFF ] T uesday [ O FF ] Wednesday [ O FF ]
Thursday [ O F F ] Friday [ OFF ] Saturday [ O F F ]
00:00 [ O F F ] 01:00 [ OFF ] 02:00 [ O F F ] 03:00 [ O FF ]
04:00 [ O F F ] 05:00 [ OFF ] 06:00 [ O F F ] 07:00 [ O FF ]
08:00 [ O F F ] 09:00 [ OFF ] 10:00 [ O F F ] 11:00 [ O FF ]
12:00 [ O F F ] 13:00 [ OFF ] 14:00 [ O F F ] 15:00 [ O FF ]
16:00 [ O F F ] 17:00 [ OFF ] 18:00 [ O F F ] 19:00 [ O FF ]
20:00 [ O F F ] 21:00 [ OFF ] 22:00 [ O F F ] 23:00 [ O FF ]
----- check system -----
MAIN CPU BUS [ OK ]
FAN [ OK ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LAMP1 REMAIN TIME [ OK ]
LAMP2 REMAIN TIME [ OK ]
LAMP1 STATUS [ OK ]
LAMP2 STATUS [ OK ]
APERTURE(CO NT RAST-SHUT TER) [ OK ]
SHUTTER(MUT E-SHUTTER) [ OK ]
INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
AROUND LAMP TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
BATTERY [ OK ]
COLOR WHEEL [ OK ]
LENS MOUNTER [ OK ]
COVER OPEN [ OK ]
BRIGHTNESS SENSOR [ OK ]
ANGLE SENSOR [ OK ]
AIR FILTER CASE [ OK ]
AIR FI LTER [ OK ]
AC POWER [ OK ]
(Error code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00)
Intake air temperature : 27 degC / 80 degF
Optics module temperature : 33 degC / 91 degF
Around lamp temperature : 30 degC / 86 degF
PROJECT O R RUNTIME 1 H
POWER O N 1 times
LAMP1 O N 0 times
LAMP1 ECO 0 H
LAMP1 NO RMAL 1 H
LAMP1 REMAIN 2999 H
LAMP2 O N 1 times
LAMP2 ECO 0 H
LAMP2 NO RMAL 1 H
LAMP2 REMAIN 2999 H
-------- Current status ---------
MAIN VERSION 1.00
SUB VERSION 1.00
LAMP STATUS LAMP1=ON LAMP2=ON
INPUT RGB1 ---
0. 00kHz / 0.00Hz
REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE
----- Wired Network configuration -----
DHCP Client O FF
IP address 192.168.0. 8
MAC address 70:58:12:00:00: 0
Mon Dec 03 15: 39:36 2012
----- Memo -----
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 151
Example of the E-mail sent for an error
The following E-mail is sent when an error has occurred.
=== Panasonic projector report (ERROR) ===
Projector T ype : DZ870
Serial No : SH1234567
----- check system -----
MAIN CPU BUS [ OK ]
FAN [ OK ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LAMP1 REMAIN TIME [ OK ]
LAMP2 REMAIN TIME [ OK ]
LAMP1 STATUS [ OK ]
LAMP2 STATUS [ OK ]
APERTURE(CO NT RAST-SHUT TER) [ OK ]
SHUTTER(MUT E-SHUTTER) [ OK ]
INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
AROUND LAMP TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
BATTERY [ OK ]
COLOR WHEEL [ OK ]
LENS MOUNTER [ OK ]
COVER OPEN [ OK ]
BRIGHTNESS SENSOR [ OK ]
ANGLE SENSOR [ OK ]
AIR FILTER CASE [ FAILED ]
AIR FI LTER [ OK ]
AC POWER [ OK ]
(Error code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00)
Intake air temperature : 27 degC / 80 degF
Optics module temperature : 33 degC / 91 degF
Around lamp temperature : 30 degC / 86 degF
PROJECT O R RUNTIME 1 H
POWER O N 1 times
LAMP1 O N 0 times
LAMP1 ECO 0 H
LAMP1 NO RMAL 1 H
LAMP1 REMAIN 2999 H
LAMP2 O N 1 times
LAMP2 ECO 0 H
LAMP2 NO RMAL 1 H
LAMP2 REMAIN 2999 H
-------- Current status ---------
MAIN VERSION 1.00
SUB VERSION 1.00
LAMP STATUS LAMP1=ON LAMP2=ON
INPUT RGB1 ---
0. 00kHz / 0.00Hz
REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE
----- Wired Network configuration -----
DHCP Client O FF
IP address 192.168.0. 8
MAC address 70:58:12:00:00: 0
Mon Dec 03 15: 39:36 2012
----- Memo -----
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
152 - ENGLISH
[Change password] page
Click [Change password].
1
2
3
1 [Administrator]
Used to change the setting of the [Administrator].
2 [User]
Used to change the setting of the [User].
3 [Next]
Used to change the setting of the password.
[Administrator] account
1
2
3
4
1 [Account]
Displays the account to change.
2 [Current]
[User name]:
Enter the user name before the change.
[Password]:
Enter the current password.
3 [New]
[User name]:
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
4 [OK]
Determines the change of password.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 153
[User] account
1
3
2
1 [Account]
Displays the account to change.
2 [New]
[User name]:
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
3 [OK]
Determines the change of password.
[Change password] (For user rights)
Only the change of password is enabled under the user rights.
1
2
4
3
1 [Old Password]
Enter the current password.
2 [New Password]
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
3 [Retype]
Enter the desired new password again.
4 [OK]
Determines the change of password.
Note
f To change the account of the administrator, you must enter the [User name] and [Password] in [Current].
[CRESTRON RoomView] page
The projector can be monitored/controlled with RoomView.
To start the RoomView control page from the web control screen, you need to access with the administrator rights. (For user rights, the
[CRESTRON RoomView] button is not displayed on the web control screen.)
The control page of RoomView is displayed by clicking [CRESTRON RoomView].
It is not displayed if Adobe Flash Player is not installed on the computer used, or the browser used does not support Flash. In that case, click
[Back] on the control page to go back to the previous page.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
154 - ENGLISH
Control page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 [Tools], [Info], [Help]
Tabs for selecting the setting, information, or help page of the
projector.
2 [POWER]
Turns on/off the power.
3 [SHUTTER]
Switches the setting whether to use the shutter function
(closing/opening of the shutter).
4 [Input Select]
Controls input selection.
Not available when the power of the projector is turned off.
5 Menu screen control buttons
Navigates the menu screen.
6 Freeze/image quality adjustment
Controls items related to freeze/image quality.
7 [Back]
Performs return to the previous page.
[Tools] page
Click [Tools] on the control page.
1
2
3
4
5
1 [Control System]
Set the information required for communicating with the
controller to be connected with the projector.
2 [User Password]
Set the user rights password for the RoomView control page.
3 [Admin Password]
Set the administrator rights password for the RoomView control
page.
4 Network status
Displays the settings of wired LAN.
[DHCP]
Displays the current setting.
[Ip Address]
Displays the current setting.
[Subnet Mask]
Displays the current setting.
[Default Gateway]
Displays the current setting.
[DNS Server]
Displays the current setting.
5 [Exit]
Returns to the control page.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 155
[Info] page
Click [Info] on the control page.
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
8
1 [Projector Name]
Displays the projector name.
2 [Mac Address]
Displays the MAC address.
3 [Lamp Hours]
Displays the runtime of the lamps (converted value).
4 [Power Status]
Displays the status of the power.
5 [Source]
Displays the selected input.
6 [Lamp Mode]
Displays the setting status of [LAMP POWER] (x page 111).
7 [Error Status]
Displays the error status.
8 [Exit]
Returns to the control page.
[Help] page
Click [Help] on the control page.
The [Help Desk] window is displayed.
1
1 [Help Desk]
Send/receive messages to/from an administrator who uses
Crestron RoomView.
156 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5 Maintenance
This chapter describes methods of inspection when there are problems, maintenance, and replacement of the units.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Lamp/temperature/lter indicators
ENGLISH - 157
Lamp/temperature/lter indicators
When an indicator lights up
If a problem should occur inside the projector, the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>, the temperature indicator <TEMP>, and the lter
indicator <FILTER> will inform you by lighting or ashing. Check the status of the indicators and manage the indicated problems as follows.
Attention
f When switching off the projector to deal with problems, make sure to follow the procedure in “Switching off the projector” (x page 57).
Lamp indicator <LAMP1>
Lamp indicator <LAMP2>
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>
Indicator status
Lighting in red/lighting in
orange
*1
Flashing in red
(1 time)
Flashing in red
(3 times)
Status
Time to replace the lamp
unit. (x page 161)
The lamp unit is not
installed.
A problem is detected in the lamp or the power supply for
the lamp.
Cause
f Was [REPLACE LAMP]
displayed when you
turned on the power?
f The indicator lights up
when the runtime of
the lamp unit reaches
2 800 hours (when
[LAMP POWER] is set to
[NORMAL]).
f Is the lamp unit attached?
f Have you turned on the
power again immediately
after turning it off?
f Some error has occurred
in the lamp circuit. Check
for uctuation (or drop) in
the source voltage.
Solution f Replace the lamp unit.
f Install the lamp unit if it is
not installed.
f If the indicator is still
ashing in red even when
having installed the lamp
unit, consult your dealer.
f Wait a while until the
luminous lamp cools
off, and then turn on the
power.
f Turn the <MAIN POWER>
switch to <OFF>
(x page 57), and
consult your dealer.
*1 The indicator lights up in red while the lamp is turned off, and lights up in orange while the lamp is turned on.
Note
f If the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2> are still lit or ashing after taking the preceding measures, ask your dealer for repair.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Lamp/temperature/lter indicators
158 - ENGLISH
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Indicator status Lighting in red
Flashing in red
(2 times)
Flashing in red
(3 times)
Status Warm-up status
Internal temperature is high
(warning).
Internal temperature is high
(standby status).
The cooling fan has
stopped.
Cause
f Did you turn on the power
when the temperature
was low (around 0 °C
(32 °F))?
f Is the air intake/exhaust port blocked?
f Is the room temperature high?
f Is the lter indicator <FILTER> lit?
Solution
f Wait at least ve minutes
in the current status.
f Install the projector in a
location with the operating
environment temperature
between 0 °C (32 °F) and
45 °C (113 °F)
*1
.
f Remove any objects that are blocking the air intake/
exhaust port.
f Install the projector in a location with the operating
environment temperature between 0 °C (32 °F) and
45 °C (113 °F)
*1
.
f Do not use the projector at high altitudes of 2 700 m
(8 858') or higher above sea level.
f Clean or replace the air lter. (x page 159)
f Turn the <MAIN POWER>
switch to <OFF>
(x page 57), and
consult your dealer.
*1 When using the projector at high altitudes (1 400 m (4 593') or higher – lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level), the operating environment
temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F).
Note
f If the temperature indicator <TEMP> is still lit or ashing after taking the preceding measures, ask your dealer for repair.
f If you use the projector with the following two settings, the light output may drop by approx. 20 % to protect the projector when the operating
environment temperature becomes 40 °C (104 °F) or higher (35 °C (95 °F) or higher when [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] is set to [ON]).
g When [LAMP SELECT] is set to [DUAL] from the menu
g When [LAMP POWER] is set to [NORMAL] from the menu
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Indicator status Lighting in red Flashing in red
Status
The lter is clogged.
The temperature inside or outside the projector is abnormally high.
The air lter case is not
attached.
Cause f Is the air lter dirty?
f Is the air intake/exhaust
port blocked?
f Is [HIGH ALTITUDE
MODE] set correctly?
f Is the air lter case
attached?
Solution
f Clean or replace the air
lter. (x page 159)
f Remove any objects that
are blocking the air intake/
exhaust port.
f When using the projector
at high altitudes between
1 400 m (4 593') or higher
and lower than 2 700 m
(8 858') above sea level,
set [HIGH ALTITUDE
MODE] (x page 109) to
[ON].
f Do not use the projector
at high altitudes of
2 700 m (8 858') or higher
above sea level.
f Attach the air lter case.
Note
f If the lter indicator <FILTER> is still lit or ashing after taking the preceding measures, ask your dealer for repair.
f If the air lter case is not attached when the projector is switched on, the lter indicator <FILTER> ashes in red, and then the projector is
switched off after ten minutes.
f If the lter is clogged, only one lamp may light even when [LAMP SELECT] is set to [DUAL]. The status can be reset when the air lter is
cleaned or replaced.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
ENGLISH - 159
Maintenance/replacement
Before performing maintenance/replacement
f Make sure to turn off the power before maintaining the projector or replacing the unit. (x pages 54, 57)
f When switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector” (x page 57).
Maintenance
Outer case
Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.
f If the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector with a dry cloth.
f Do not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may deteriorate the outer case.
f When using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.
Lens front surface
Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.
f Do not use a cloth that is uffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.
f Since the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.
Attention
f The lens is made of glass. Impacts or excessive force when wiping may scratch its surface. Handle with care.
Air Filter
Perform maintenance of the air lter in the following cases.
f The air lter is clogged with dust, causing the lter replacement message to appear on the screen and the lter indicator <FILTER> to light
in red.
Removing the air lter
Lamp unit cover
Lamp unit cover fixing screw
Button
Air filter (to the lamp unit 2)
Fig. 1
Air filter
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Air filter case
Air filter (to the lamp
unit 1)
1) Remove the lamp unit cover. (Fig. 1)
f Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the lamp unit cover xing screw (x1) counterclockwise until it turns freely, and open the lamp unit
cover slowly in the direction of the arrow.
f Opening the lamp unit cover quickly may result in damage to the cover.
f If you loosen the lamp unit cover xing screw with the projector installed upward in the vertical direction, the lamp unit cover may open
on its weight and the lamp unit may be dropped off.
2) Pull out the air filter case. (Fig. 2)
f Pull out the air lter case from the projector while pressing the button on the projector.
3) Remove the air filter from the air filter case. (Fig. 3)
Chapter 5Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
160 - ENGLISH
Cleaning the air lter
Remove the air lter beforehand with the previously described procedure of “Removing the air lter”.
1) Clean the air filter.
f Vacuum dust from the air lter with a vacuum cleaner.
Attaching the air lter
Fig. 1
Air filter (to the lamp unit 2)
Air filter case
Air filter (to the lamp unit 1)
1) Attach the air filter. (Fig. 1)
f Insert the air lter to the lter case rib securely.
2) Attach the air filter case to the projector.
f Push in the air lter case securely until the clicking sound is made.
3) Attach the lamp unit cover.
f Close the lamp unit cover in the reverse order of Step 1) of “Removing the air lter”.
f Attach the lamp unit cover so that the connector of the lamp unit cover is inserted to the fan power connector securely.
f Use a Phillips screwdriver to rmly tighten the lamp unit xing screw (x1).
f Make sure to attach the lamp unit cover securely.
Note
f Make sure that the air lter case is properly attached before using the projector. If it is not properly attached, the projector will suck in dirt
and dust causing a malfunction.
f If you use the projector without attaching the air lter case, the lter indicator <FILTER> ashes in red and the message appears on the
projection screen for approximately 30 seconds.
f Do not use water when washing the air lter. Washing with water may decrease the dust absorption capability.
f When the dust remains after cleaning, it is time to replace the air lter.
The air lter for replacement (TMZX5209) is an optional accessory (service part). To purchase the product, consult your dealer.
One air lter is provided for the optional Replacement lamp unit (Model No.: ET-LAD120 (1 pc)), and two air lters are provided for the
optional Replacement lamp unit (Model No.: ET-LAD120W (2 pcs)).
Replacing the unit
Lamp unit
The lamp unit is a consumable component. Refer to “When to replace the lamp unit” (x page 161) for details about the replacement cycle.
When purchasing the optional accessory of Replacement lamp unit (Model No.: ET-LAD120 (1 pc), ET-LAD120W (2 pcs)), consult your dealer.
It is recommended that you request a qualied technician to replace the lamp unit. Consult your dealer.
Warning
Replace the lamp unit after the lamp has cooled (after waiting at least one hour).
The high temperature inside the cover will cause burns.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
ENGLISH - 161
Checking the lamp unit to be replaced
1) Check the status of the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>.
f The lamp unit corresponding to the lamp indicator that is lit in red is required to be replaced.
Notes on the replacement of the lamp unit
f A Phillips screwdriver is necessary when replacing the lamp unit.
f Since the luminous lamp is made of glass, it may burst if dropped or hit with a hard object. Handle with care.
f Do not disassemble or modify the lamp unit.
f When replacing the lamp unit, be sure to hold it by the handle because its surface is pointed and its shape is protruded.
f The lamp may rapture. Replace the lamp unit carefully so the glass fragments of the lamp do not scatter. While attaching the projector to the
ceiling, do not work right under the lamp unit or do not conduct work while your face is near the lamp unit.
f The lamp contains mercury. When disposing of used lamp units, contact your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal.
Attention
f Panasonic takes no responsibility for any damage or malfunction of the product resulting from use of lamp units which are not manufactured
by Panasonic. Use only specied lamp units.
Note
f The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
When to replace the lamp unit
The lamp unit is a consumable component. Since its brightness gradually decreases over time, it is necessary to replace the lamp unit
regularly. The estimated duration before replacement is 3 000 hours, but the lamp may go off before reaching to 3 000 hours, depending on
the characteristics of the individual lamp, usage conditions, and the installation environment. It is recommended that the Replacement lamp
unit be prepared earlier.
If you continue to use the lamp unit after 3 000 hours has elapsed, the lamp turns off automatically after approximately 10 minutes, as it may
cause malfunction of the projector.
On-screen display
REPLACE LAMP
Lamp indicator
Over 2 800 hours
The message is displayed for 30 seconds. Pressing
any button on the control panel or remote control
within 30 seconds will clear the message.
The indicator lights in red even during the standby
mode. (Only the corresponding lamp lights on.)
Over 3 000 hours
The message remains displayed until you press any
button.
Note
f To predict when to replace the lamp, check the lamp runtime displayed on [LAMP1] and [LAMP2] in [STATUS] (x page 119).
f 3 000 hours is only the target for replacement and not the warranty time.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
162 - ENGLISH
How to replace the lamp unit
Attention
f When the projector is mounted on the ceiling, do not conduct work while your face is near the lamp unit.
f Make sure to attach the lamp unit and the lamp unit cover securely.
f If the lamp unit is not installed properly, remove it and then push it in slowly. Pushing it in quickly or forcibly may break the connector.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Lamp unit cover
Lamp unit cover fixing screw
Lamp unit 2
Handles
Lamp unit 1
Lamp unit fixing screws
Fan power connector
1) Set the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
f Wait at least one hour and check if the lamp unit has cooled down.
2) Remove the lamp unit cover. (Fig. 1)
f Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the lamp unit cover xing screw (x1) counterclockwise until it turns freely, and open the lamp unit
cover slowly in the direction of the arrow.
f Opening the lamp unit cover quickly may result in damage to the cover.
f If you loosen the lamp unit cover xing screw with the projector installed upward in the vertical direction, the lamp unit cover may open
on its weight and the lamp unit may be dropped off.
3) Remove the lamp unit. (Fig. 2)
f Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the lamp unit xing screws (x2) counterclockwise until they turn freely, and then remove the lamp
unit.
f Hold the handles of the lamp unit and remove it straight.
4) Push in the new lamp unit while paying attention to the insertion position.
f If the lamp unit is not installed properly, remove it and then push it in slowly. Pushing it in quickly or forcibly may break the connector.
5) Use a Phillips screwdriver to firmly tighten the lamp unit fixing screws (x2 each).
f Make sure to attach the lamp unit securely.
6) Attach the lamp unit cover.
i) Close the lamp unit cover in Step 2) in the reverse order.
f Attach the lamp unit cover so that the connector of the lamp unit cover is inserted to the fan power connector securely.
ii) Use a Phillips screwdriver to firmly tighten the lamp unit fixing screw (x1).
f Make sure to attach the lamp unit cover securely.
Note
f When you replace the lamp unit with new one, the projector resets the runtime of the lamp unit automatically.
Air lter
When the dust remains after cleaning, the lter replacement timing has come.
The air lter for the replacement (TMZX5209) is the optional accessories (service part). To purchase the product, consult your dealer.
When replacing the lamp unit, replace the corresponding air lter.
One air lter is provided for the optional accessory of Replacement lamp unit (Model No.: ET-LAD120 (1 pc)) and two air lters are attached to
Replacement lamp unit (Model No.: ET-LAD120W (2 pcs)).
Chapter 5Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
ENGLISH - 163
Replacing the air lter
Attention
f Make sure to turn off the power before replacing the air lter.
f When attaching the air lter, make sure that the projector is stable, and perform the replacement in a safe place where the unit will not be
damaged even if you drop the air lter.
1) Remove the air filter.
f Refer to “Removing the air lter” (x page 159).
2) Replace the air filter to the new one and attach the air filter case to the projector.
f Refer to “Attaching the air lter” (x page 160).
Attention
f When switching on the projector, make sure that the air lter is attached. If it is not properly attached, the projector will suck in dirt and dust
causing a malfunction.
f If you use the projector without attaching the air lter case, the lter indicator <FILTER> ashes in red and the message appears on the
projection screen for approximately 30 seconds.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Troubleshooting
164 - ENGLISH
Troubleshooting
Review the following points. For details, see the corresponding pages.
Problems Points to be checked Page
Power does not turn on.
f Is the power plug rmly inserted into the outlet?
f Is the <MAIN POWER> switch set to <OFF>? 57
f Is the wall outlet supplying electricity?
f Have the circuit breakers tripped?
f Are the lamp indicator <LAMP1>/<LAMP2> or the temperature indicator <TEMP> lit
or ashing?
157
f Is the lamp unit cover attached? 162
No image appears.
f Are connections to external devices correctly performed? 49
f Is the input selection setting correct? 62
f Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum? 71
f Is the external device that is connected to the projector working properly?
f Is the shutter function in use? 61
f If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is ashing in red, consult your
dealer.
f Is the lens cover still attached to the lens? 55
Image is fuzzy.
f Is the lens focus set correctly? 58
f Is the projection distance appropriate? 33
f Is the lens dirty? 19
f Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen?
Color is pale or grayish.
f Is [COLOR] or [TINT] adjusted correctly? 72
f Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly? 49
f Is the RGB cable damaged?
Remote control does not
respond.
f Are the batteries depleted?
f Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly? 29
f Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control
signal receiver of the projector?
25
f Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range? 25
f Are other forms of light, such as uorescent light, affecting the projection? 25
f Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
[DISABLE]?
131
f Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control? 176
f Is the ID number setting operation correct? 29
Menu screen does not
appear.
f Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)? 101
Buttons on the control
panel do not operate.
f Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
[DISABLE]?
131
f Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control? 176
Image does not display
correctly.
f Is the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] selection set correctly? 76
f Is there a problem with the video tape or other image sources?
f Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input? 178
Image from a computer
does not appear.
f Is the cable too long? (Use D-Sub cables that are 10 m (32'10") or shorter.)
f Is the external video output on the laptop computer set correctly? (Ex.: The
external output settings may be switched by pressing “Fn” + “F3” or “Fn” + “F10”
simultaneously. Since the method varies depending on the computer type, refer to
the user manual provided with your computer.)
Image output from DVI-D
of the computer does not
appear.
f Is the [DVI-D IN] setting [EDID3] or [EDID2:PC]? 98
f The graphics accelerator driver of the computer may need to be updated to the
latest version.
f The computer may need to be restarted after performing the [DVI-D IN] setting. 98
Video from HDMI
compatible device does
not appear or it appears
jumbled.
f Is the HDMI cable connected securely? 49
f Turn the power of the projector and the external device on and off.
f Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input? 178
Cannot control the
projector with Art-Net.
f Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector or
an external device correctly done?
f Is the [Art-Net] setting [ON]?
f Are the [PORT ADDRESS] and [START ADDRESS] settings correct?
Chapter 5Maintenance — Troubleshooting
ENGLISH - 165
Problems Points to be checked Page
The DIGITAL LINK input
image is not displayed.
f Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector or
an external device correctly done?
f Is [DIGITAL LINK MODE] set to [AUTO] or [DIGITAL LINK]? Is it set to
[ETHERNET]?
134
f Is a signal which is not compatible with a twisted-pair-cable transmitter being input?
3D function is not working.
f Is the [3D INPUT FORMAT] setting of [3D SETTINGS] correct? 91
f Check the 3D eyewear settings.
f Is a signal which is supported by the projector being input? 180
Left and right images are
reversed (not showing
properly).
f Are the devices synchronized? Check the 3D eyewear settings.
f Change the [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] setting of [3D SETTINGS]. 92
Image in the 3D eyewear
ickers.
f Are you within the reception range?
3D eyewear is not
functioning.
f Are batteries of the 3D eyewear drained? If you use the rechargeable 3D eyewear,
charge it. If you use the battery-powered 3D eyewear, replace the battery.
f Is the [3D SETTINGS] setting correct? 90
Attention
f If problems persist even after checking the preceding points, consult your dealer.
166 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Appendix
This chapter describes specications and after-sales service for the projector.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 167
Technical information
PJLink protocol
The network function of this projector supports the PJLink class 1, and the PJLink protocol can be used to perform projector setting and
projector status query operations from a computer.
Control commands
The following table lists the PJLink protocol commands that can be used to control the projector.
f x characters in tables are non-specic characters.
Command Control details Parameter / return string Remark
POWR Power supply control
0 Standby
1 Power on
POWR?
Power supply status
query
0 Standby
1 Power on
2 Preparing for switching off the projector
3 Warm-up
INPT Input selection
11 RGB1
12 RGB2
21 VIDEO
INPT? Input selection query
31 DVI-D
32 HDMI
33 DIGITAL LINK
34 SDI (only for PT-DZ870E)
AVMT Shutter control 30 Shutter function off (shutter open)
AVMT? Shutter status query 31 Shutter function on (shutter closed)
ERST? Error status query xxxxxx
1st byte
Indicates fan errors, and returns
0 - 2.
f 0 = No error is
detected
f 1 = Warning
f 2 = Error
2nd byte
Indicates lamp errors, and
returns 0 - 2.
3rd byte
Indicates temperature errors,
and returns 0 - 2.
4th byte
Indicates cover open errors,
and returns 0 or 2.
5th byte
Indicates lter errors, and
returns 0 - 2.
6th byte
Indicates other errors, and
returns 0 - 2.
LAMP? Lamp status query xxxxxxxxxxxx
1st digits (1 - 5 digits): Lamp 1 runtime
2nd digit: 0 = Lamp 1 off, 1 = Lamp 1 on
3rd digits (1 - 5 digits): Lamp 2 runtime
4th digit: 0 = Lamp 2 off, 1 = Lamp 2 on
INST? Input selection list query
11 12 21 31 32 33 34 Only for PT-DZ870E
11 12 21 31 32 33 Only for PT-DW830E, PT-DX100E
NAME? Projector name query xxxxx
Returns the name set in [PROJECTOR NAME] of [NETWORK
SETUP].
INF1?
Manufacturer name
query
Panasonic Returns manufacturer name.
INF2? Model name query
DZ870
DW830
DX100
Returns model name.
INF0?
Other information
queries
xxxxx Returns information such as version number.
CLSS? Class information query 1 Returns class for PJLink.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
168 - ENGLISH
PJLink security authentication
The password used for PJLink is the same as that of the password set for web control.
When using the projector without security authentication, do not set a password for web control.
f For specications related to PJLink, refer to the website of Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association.
URL http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/
Using Art-Net function
The network function of the projector supports the Art-Net function, and the Art-Net protocol can operate the DMX controller setting, and the
application software can control the projector setting.
CHANNEL DEFINITION
The following table lists the channel denitions used for controlling the projector with the Art-Net function.
Channel Control details Performance Parameter Remark
1 Shutter control
SHUTTER:OPEN 0-63
No operation 64-191
SHUTTER:CLOSE 192-255
2 Input selection
No operation 0-7
RGB1 8-15
RGB2 16-23
VIDEO 24-31
DVI-D 32-39
HDMI 40-47
DIGITAL LINK 48-55
SDI (only for PT-DZ870E) 56-63
No operation 64-127
Execute P IN P, USER1 128-135
Execute P IN P, USER2 136-143
Execute P IN P, USER3 144-151
No operation 152-255
3 Lens function select
No operation 0-15
Lens H shift 16-31
Operate together with “Lens
adjustment” of the channel 4.
Lens V shift 32-47
Lens focus 48-63
Lens zoom 64-79
Move to the home position 80-95
Operate together with “Command
performance execute” of the channel
4.
No operation 96-255
4 Lens control
Lens
adjustment
(
-
) High speed 0-31
(
-
) Low speed 32-63
(
-
) Fine
adjustment
64-95
Adjustment stop 96-127
Lens
adjustment
(+) Fine
adjustment
128-159
(+) Low speed 160-191
(+) High speed 192-223
Command performance
execute
224-255
5 Power supply control
Standby 0-63
No operation 64-191
Power on 192-255
6 Light volume adjustment
100 % 0
Can be set in 256 steps between
100 % and 0 %.
... ...
0 % 255
7 Lock
Operation not available 0-127 When “Operation not available” is
set, operation of all channels become
unacceptable.
Operation available 128-255
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 169
Channel Control details Performance Parameter Remark
8 Fade-in time setting
0.0s 0-15
Operate together with channel 1.
0.5s 16-31
1.0s 32-47
1.5s 48-63
2.0s 64-79
2.5s 80-95
3.0s 96-111
3.5s 112-127
4.0s 128-143
5.0s 144-159
7.0s 160-175
10.0s 176-191
No operation 192-255
9 Fade-out time setting
0.0s 0-15
Operate together with channel 1.
0.5s 16-31
1.0s 32-47
1.5s 48-63
2.0s 64-79
2.5s 80-95
3.0s 96-111
3.5s 112-127
4.0s 128-143
5.0s 144-159
7.0s 160-175
10.0s 176-191
No operation 192-255
10 Custom masking
OFF 0-31
To use this function, the optional
Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is
required.
PC-1 32-63
PC-2 64-95
PC-3 96-127
No operation 128-255
11 Geometry
OFF 0-15
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
To use PC-1, PC-2, or PC-3, the
optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.:
ET-UK20) is required.
KEYSTONE 16-31
CURVED 32-47
PC-1 48-63
PC-2 64-79
PC-3 80-95
CORNER CORRECTION 96-111
No operation 112-255
Note
f If the projector is operated with the remote control or on the control panel, or by the control command while controlling the projector by
using the Art-Net function, the setting of the DMX controller and the computer application may be different from the projector status. In that
case, set the “Lock” setting of the channel 7 to “Operation not available” and then reset to “Operation available”. The controls of all channels
become reected to the projector.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
170 - ENGLISH
Control commands via LAN
When web control administrator rights password is set (Protect mode)
Connecting
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request for a
connection to the projector.
f You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address
Obtain from the main menu [NETWORK] [NETWORK STATUS]
Port number
Obtain from the main menu [NETWORK] [NETWORK CONTROL] [COMMAND PORT]
2) Check the response from the projector.
Data section Blank Mode Blank Random number section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
“NTCONTROL”
(ASCII string)
‘ ’
0x20
‘1’
0x31
‘ ’
0x20
“zzzzzzzz”
(ASCII code hex number)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 1 byte
f Mode: 1 = Protect mode
3) Generate a 32-byte hash value from the following data using MD5 algorithm.
f “xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz”
xxxxxx Administrator rights user name for the web control (default user name is “admin1”)
yyyyy Password of above administrator rights user (default password is “panasonic”)
zzzzzzzz 8-byte random number obtained in Step 2)
Command transmission method
Transmit using the following command formats.
r Transmitted data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
Hash value
(Refer to “Connecting” above)
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 32 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
r Received data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
r Error response
String Details
Termination
symbol
Message
“ERR1” Undened control command
(CR)
0x0d
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period
“ERR5” Wrong data length
“ERRA” Password mismatch
Data length 4 bytes 1 byte
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 171
When web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)
Connecting
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request for a
connection to the projector.
f You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address
Obtain from the main menu [NETWORK] [NETWORK STATUS]
Port number
Obtain from the main menu [NETWORK] [NETWORK CONTROL] [COMMAND PORT]
2) Check the response from the projector.
Data section Blank Mode
Termination
symbol
Command
example
“NTCONTROL”
(ASCII string)
‘ ’
0x20
‘0’
0x30
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
f Mode: 0 = Non-protect mode
Command transmission method
Transmit using the following command formats.
r Transmitted data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
r Received data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
r Error response
String Details
Termination
symbol
Message
“ERR1” Undened control command
(CR)
0x0d
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period
“ERR5” Wrong data length
“ERRA” Password mismatch
Data length 4 bytes 1 byte
<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal
The <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal of the projector conforms with RS-232C so that the projector can be connected to and controlled
from a computer.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
172 - ENGLISH
Connection
Projector connecting terminals
Computer
D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)
D-Sub 9p (male)
Communication cable (straight)
Single projector
Multiple projectors
Connecting terminals on projector 2
D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)
D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)
Connecting terminals on projector 1
Computer
D-Sub 9p (male) D-Sub 9p (female)
D-Sub 9p (male)
Communication cableCommunication cable
DIGITAL LINK compatible device
Computer
D-Sub 9p (female)
Projector connecting terminals
DIGITAL LINK DIGITAL LINK
D-Sub 9p (male)
Communication cable (straight)
When connecting with the DIGITAL LINK compatible devices
LAN cable (straight)
Note
f The destination of [RS-232C] (x page 118) must be set according to the connection method.
f When connecting by a DIGITAL LINK compatible device, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STANDBY MODE] (x page 116) setting
to [NORMAL] to control the projector during standby.
When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the projector cannot be control during standby.
Pin assignments and signal names
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Details
(9) (6)
(5) (1)
(1) NC
(2) TXD Transmitted data
(3) RXD Received data
(4) NC
(5) GND Earth
(6) NC
(7) CTS
Connected internally
(8) RTS
(9) NC
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 173
D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Details
(6) (9)
(1) (5)
(1) NC
(2) RXD Received data
(3) TXD Transmitted data
(4) NC
(5) GND Earth
(6) NC
(7) RTS
Connected internally
(8) CTS
(9) NC
Communication conditions (Factory default)
Signal level RS-232C-compliant
Sync. method Asynchronous
Baud rate 9 600 bps
Parity None
Character length 8 bits
Stop bit 1 bit
X parameter None
S parameter None
Basic format
Transmission from the computer starts with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this order. Add parameters according
to the details of control.
(2 bytes)
2 ID characters (2 bytes)
Semi-colon (1 byte)
Colon (1 byte)
3 command characters (3 bytes)
Parameter (undefined length)
Start (1 byte)
ZZ, 01 to 06
ID designate
End (1 byte)
Basic format (has subcommands)
Parameter (6 bytes)
*1
Symbol “+” or “-” (1 byte) and setting or adjustment value (5
bytes)
Operation (1 byte)
*1
“=” (Set the value specified using parameter)
Sub command (5 bytes)
Same as the basic format
*1 When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, an operation (E) and parameter are not necessary.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
174 - ENGLISH
Attention
f If a command is transmitted after the lamp starts illuminating, there may be a delay in response or the command may not be executed. Try
sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds.
f When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the response from the projector before
sending the next command. When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, a colon (:) is not necessary.
Note
f If a command cannot be executed, the “ER401” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
f If an invalid parameter is sent, the “ER402” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
f ID transmission in RS-232C supports ZZ (ALL) and 01 to 64, as well as 0A to 0Z groups.
f If a command is sent with a specied ID, a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases.
g It matches the projector ID
g ID setting is set to ALL and [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is [ON]
g ID setting is set to GROUP and [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is [ON]
f STX and ETX are character codes. STX shown in hexadecimal is 02, and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03.
When multiple projectors are controlled
When multiple projectors are all controlled
When controlling multiple projectors together via RS-232C, perform the following settings.
1) Set a different ID for each projector.
2) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector.
3) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).
When multiple projectors are all controlled by group unit
When controlling multiple projectors by group unit via RS-232C, perform the following settings.
1) Set a different ID for each projector.
2) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector.
3) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).
Note
f There will be no response if two or more projectors have [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] set to [ON].
f There will be no response if two or more projectors of the same group have [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] set to [ON].
f When setting multiple groups, set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector in each group.
Cable specication
1 NC NC 1
2 2
3 3
4 NC NC 4
5 5
6 NC NC 6
7 7
8 8
9 NC NC 9
1 NC NC 1
2 2
3 3
4 NC NC 4
5 5
6 NC NC 6
7 7
8 8
9 NC NC 9
When connected to a computer
Projector
(<SERIAL IN> terminal)
Computer
(DTE specifications)
When multiple projectors are connected
Projector 1
(<SERIAL OUT>
terminal)
Projector 2
(<SERIAL IN>
terminal)
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 175
Control command
The following table lists the commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer.
r Projector control command
Command Details
Parameter/response
string
Remark (parameter)
PON Power on
To check if the power is on, use the “Power query” command.
POF Power standby
QPW Power query
000
001
STANDBY
Power on
IIS
Switching the input
signal
VID VIDEO
RG1 RGB1
RG2 RGB2
DVI DVI-D
HD1 HDMI
DL1 DIGITAL LINK
SD1 SDI (only for PT-DZ870E)
QSL Query for lamp selection
0 DUAL
1 SINGLE
2 LAMP1
3 LAMP2
LPM Lamp selection
0 DUAL
1 SINGLE
*1
2 LAMP1
3 LAMP2
Q$L
Lamp cumulative
runtime query
1 LAMP1
2 LAMP2
Response is 0000 to 4000
OLP Lamp power
0 NORMAL
1 ECO
OSH Shutter 0 OPEN
QSH Shutter status query 1 CLOSE
VSE Aspect ratio switch
0 DEFAULT/VID AUTO
1 4:3
2 16:9
5 THROUGH
QSE
Aspect ratio settings
query
6 HV FIT
9 H FIT
10 V FIT
OPP P IN P execute
0 OFF
1 USER1
2 USER2
3 USER3
QPP P IN P setting query
0 OFF
1 USER1
2 USER2
3 USER3
OCS Sub memory switch
01 - 96 Sub memory number
QSB
Sub memory status
query
*1 Use Lamp 1 or Lamp 2 whichever has a shorter runtime.
r Projector control command (with sub command)
Command Sub command Details Remark
VXX RYCI1 RGB1 input setting +00000 = RGB/YP
B
P
R
, +00001 = Y/C
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
176 - ENGLISH
r Lens control command
Command Sub command Details Remark
VXX LNSI2 Lens H shift
+00000 = Fine adjustment 1+, +00001 = Fine adjustment 1
-
, +00100
= Fine adjustment 2+, +00101 = Fine adjustment 2
-
, +00200 = Coarse
adjustment+, +00201 = Coarse adjustment
-
VXX LNSI3 Lens V shift
VXX LNSI4 Lens focus
VXX LNSI5 Lens zoom
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
It is possible to control the projector remotely (by external contact) from a control panel located away from the projector where remote control
signals cannot reach.
Use the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal on the connecting terminals of the projector to connect to the control panel.
Remote control Contact control
Remote control/contact control
Standby Lit
Lamp
RGB1 VIDEO
RGB2 HDMI
DVI-D
Installation locations in meeting rooms, etc.
Remote control board in another location
Pin assignments and signal names
D-Sub 9-pin
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Open (H) Short (L)
(9) (6)
(5) (1)
(1) GND GND
(2) POWER OFF ON
(3) RGB1 Other RGB1
(4) RGB2 Other RGB2
(5) VIDEO Other VIDEO
(6) HDMI Other HDMI
(7) DVI-D Other DVI-D
(8) SHUTTER OFF ON
(9) RST/SET
Controlled by remote
control
Controlled by external
contact
Attention
f When controlling, make sure to short-circuit pins (1) and (9).
f When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for
RS-232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also disabled.
g Power on <b> button, power standby <v> button, <SHUTTER> button
f When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, and then any pins from (3) to (7) and the pin (1) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the
control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for RS-232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also
disabled.
g Power on <b> button, power standby <v> button, <RGB1/RGB2> button, <DVI-D> button, <VIDEO> button, <HDMI> button, <DIGITAL
LINK> button, <SDI> button, <SHUTTER> button
Note
f For pin (2) to pin (8) settings, you can make changes if you set [REMOTE2 MODE] to [USER]. (x page 121)
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 177
Two-window display combination list
Sub window
RGB1 RGB2
VIDEO
input
Main window RGB Movie
*1
Y/C input RGB Movie
*1
RGB1
RGB
l l l
Movie
*1
l a a
Y/C input
l a
RGB2
RGB
l l l
l
Movie
*1
l a a
a
VIDEO input
l a
l a
DVI-D
RGB
*2
l l l l l l
Movie
*3
l a a l a a
HDMI
RGB
*2
l l l l l l
Movie
*3
l a a l a a
SDI
l a a l a a
DIGITAL LINK
RGB
*2
Movie
*3
Sub window
DVI-D HDMI
SDI
DIGITAL LINK
Main window RGB
*2
Movie
*3
RGB
*2
Movie
*3
RGB
*2
Movie
*3
RGB1
RGB
l l l l l
Movie
*1
l a l a a
Y/C input
l a l a a
RGB2
RGB
l l l l l
Movie
*1
l a l a a
VIDEO input
l a l a a
DVI-D
RGB
*2
l l l
Movie
*3
l a a
HDMI
RGB
*2
l l
Movie
*3
l a
SDI
l a
DIGITAL LINK
RGB
*2
Movie
*3
l: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible
a: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible through the same frequency
―:P IN P (picture in picture) combination is not possible
*1 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, 1080/60p
*2 VGA (640 x 480) - WUXGA (1 920 x 1 200)
Non-interlace signal, dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz (The WUXGA signal is only compatible with VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking)
signals.)
*3 Only supports 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, and 1080/60p
Control device password
To initialize your password, consult your distributor.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
178 - ENGLISH
Upgrade Kit
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
If the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is applied, the following functions are extended.
Function Standard status When the Upgrade Kit is applied
Adjustment range of
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
Maximum of ±40°
*1
Maximum of ±45°
*1
Adjustment range of
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
Maximum of ±15°
*1
Maximum of ±40°
*1
Adjustment range of
[CURVED]
Vertical arc, Maximum ±50°
*1
Horizontal arc, Maximum ±50°
*1
Vertical arc, Maximum ±100°
*1
Horizontal arc, Maximum ±100°
*1
[CUSTOM MASKING] Cannot be used. The image can be masked in optional form.
[PC CORRECTION] of
[UNIFORMITY]
Cannot be used. The brightness and unevenness of color of the entire
screen can be corrected.
*1 The adjustment range of the menu. Refer to “[GEOMETRY(2D)] projection range” (x page 34) for the possible projection range.
For details, refer to the Operating Instructions included in the CD-ROM of the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20).
List of compatible signals
The following table species the video signals compatible with the projector.
f Symbols that indicate formats are as follows.
g V: VIDEO, Y/C
g R: RGB
g Y: YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
g D: DVI-D
g H: HDMI
g S: SDI (only for PT-DZ870E)
Mode
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
Format
Plug and play
*1
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
RGB2
DVI-D
HDMI
EDID1 EDID2 EDID3
NTSC/NTSC4.43/
PAL-M/PAL60
720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 V
PAL/PAL-N/SECAM 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 V
525i (480i) 720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 13.5 R/Y/S
625i (576i) 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 13.5 R/Y/S
525i (480i) 720 (1440) x 480i
*2
15.7 59.9 27.0 D/H
625i (576i) 720 (1440) x 576i
*2
15.6 50.0 27.0 D/H
525p (480p) 720 x 483 31.5 59.9 27.0 R/Y/D/H
l
l l
625p (576p) 720 x 576 31.3 50.0 27.0 R/Y/D/H
l
l l
750 (720)/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
750 (720)/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
1125 (1080)/60i
*3
1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
1125 (1080)/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
1125 (1080)/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
1125 (1080)/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
1125 (1080)/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l
1125 (1080)/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
1125 (1080)/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
1125 (1080)/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
VESA400
640 x 400 31.5 70.1 25.2 R/D/H
640 x 400 37.9 85.1 31.5 R/D/H
VGA480
640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2 R/D/H
l l l l l
640 x 480 35.0 66.7 30.2 R/D/H
640 x 480 37.9 72.8 31.5 R/D/H
l
l l l
640 x 480 37.5 75.0 31.5 R/D/H
l
l l l
640 x 480 43.3 85.0 36.0 R/D/H
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 179
Mode
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
Format
Plug and play
*1
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
RGB2
DVI-D
HDMI
EDID1 EDID2 EDID3
SVGA
800 x 600 35.2 56.3 36.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
800 x 600 48.1 72.2 50.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
800 x 600 46.9 75.0 49.5 R/D/H
l
l l l
800 x 600 53.7 85.1 56.3 R/D/H
MAC16 832 x 624 49.7 74.6 57.3 R/D/H
l
l l l
XGA
1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9 R/D/H
1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 024 x 768 56.5 70.1 75.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 024 x 768 60.0 75.0 78.8 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 024 x 768 65.5 81.6 86.0 R/D/H
1 024 x 768 68.7 85.0 94.5 R/D/H
1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3 R/D/H
*4
1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1 R/D/H
*4
l
l l l
MXGA
1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6 R/D/H
1 152 x 864 64.0 70.0 94.2 R/D/H
1 152 x 864 67.5 74.9 108.0 R/D/H
1 152 x 864 77.1 85.0 119.7 R/D/H
MAC21 1 152 x 870 68.7 75.1 100.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1280 x 720
1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5 R/D/H
1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5 R/D/H
1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8 R/D/H
*4
1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6 R/D/H
*4
1280 x 768
1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3 R/D/H
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5 R/D/H
1 280 x 768
*5
47.4 60.0 68.3 R/D/H
1 280 x 768 60.3 74.9 102.3 R/D/H
1 280 x 768 68.6 84.8 117.5 R/D/H
1280 x 800
1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0 R/D/H
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5 R/D/H
l
*6
l
*6
l
*6
l
*6
1 280 x 800
*5
49.3 59.9 71.0 R/D/H
1 280 x 800 62.8 74.9 106.5 R/D/H
1 280 x 800 71.6 84.9 122.5 R/D/H
MSXGA 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0 R/D/H
SXGA
1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0 R/D/H
1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1
280 x 1 024 72.3 66.3 125.0 R/D/H
1 280 x 1 024 78.2 72.0 135.1 R/D/H
1 280 x 1 024 80.0 75.0 135.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 280 x 1 024 91.1 85.0 157.5 R/D/H
1366 x 768
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5 R/D/H
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0 R/D/H
SXGA+
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9 R/D/H
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0 R/D/H
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8 R/D/H
1 400 x 1 050 78.8 72.0 149.3 R/D/H
1 400 x 1 050 82.2 75.0 155.9 R/D/H
WXGA+
1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5 R/D/H
1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8 R/D/H
UXGA60 1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
WSXGA+
1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3 R/D/H
1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5 R/D/H
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
180 - ENGLISH
Mode
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
Format
Plug and play
*1
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
RGB2
DVI-D
HDMI
EDID1 EDID2 EDID3
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5 R/D/H
1 920 x 1 080
*5
66.6 59.9 138.5 R/D/H
1 920 x 1 080
*7
67.2 60.0 173.0 R
WUXGA
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3 R/D/H
1 920 x 1 200
*5
74.0 60.0 154.0 R/D/H
l
l l
*8
l
*8
1 920 x 1 200
*7
74.6 59.9 193.3 R
*1 Signals with l in the Plug and play columns are signals described in EDID (extended display identication data) of the projector. A signal, which
has no l in the Plug and play columns but has an entry in the Format column, can be input. For signals without l in the Plug and play columns,
resolution may not be selected in the computer even though the projector supports them.
*2 Pixel-Repetition signal (dot clock frequency 27.0 MHz) only
*3 When a 1125 (1035)/60i signal was input, it is displayed as a 1125 (1080)/60i signal.
*4 When [3D INPUT FORMAT] is set to [AUTO], 3D images in frame sequential format are displayed. To display images in 2D, set [3D INPUT
FORMAT] to [NATIVE].
*5 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant
*6 Only for PT-DW830E
*7 Samples the pixels in the image processing circuit and projects the image.
*8 Only for PT-DZ870E
Note
f The display dot for PT-DZ870E is 1 920 x 1 200, the display dot for PT-DW830E is 1 280 x 800, and the display dot for PT-DX100E is
1 024 x 768. A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots.
f The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.
f When interlaced signals are connected, ickering may occur on the projected image.
f DIGITAL LINK input compatible signal is the same as HDMI input compatible signal.
List of 3D compatible signals
The following table species the 3D compatible video signals that the projector can project.
f Abbreviations for input formats and 3D formats in the table have the following meanings.
g FP: Frame packing system
g SBS: Side by side system
g TB: Top and bottom system
g LBL: Line by line system
g FS: Frame sequential system
g 3G: 3G-SDI Level B simultaneous system
g H-D: HDMI & DVI-D Input simultaneous system
g R1-2: RGB1 & RGB2 Input simultaneous system
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
HDMI DVI-D
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
FP
SBS
*1
TB FS
SBS
*1
TB LBL FS
750 (720)/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 74.3
l l l
l l l
750 (720)/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3
l l l
l l l
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 74.3
l l
l l
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3
l l
l l
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3
l l l
l l
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0 74.3
l l
1080/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3
l l
1080/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 74.3
l l
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5
l l
l l
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5
l l
l l
VGA480 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2
l
SVGA 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0
l
XGA
1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9
l
1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0
l
1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3
l
l
1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1
l
l
MXGA 1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6
l
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 181
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
HDMI DVI-D
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
FP
SBS
*1
TB FS
SBS
*1
TB LBL FS
1280 x 720
1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5
l
1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5
l
1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8
l
l
1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6
l
l
1280 x 768
1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3
l
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5
l
1 280 x 768
*2
47.4 60.0 68.3
l
1280 x 800
1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0
l
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5
l
1 280 x 800
*2
49.3 59.9 71.0
l
MSXGA 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0
l
SXGA
1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0
l
1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0
l
1366 x 768
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5
l
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0
l
SXGA+
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9
l
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0
l
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6
l
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8
l
WXGA+
1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5
l
1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8
l
UXGA60 1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0
l
WSXGA+
1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3
l
1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5
l
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5
l
1 920 x 1 080
*2
66.6 59.9 138.5
l
WUXGA
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3
l
1 920 x 1 200
*2
74.0 60.0 154.0
l
l
*1 Supports half.
*2 VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
182 - ENGLISH
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
RGB1/RGB2 SDI
*1
H-D
R1-2
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
SBS
*2
TB
LBL
FS
SBS
*2
TB
LBL
3G
750 (720)/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 74.3
l l l
l l l l l l
750 (720)/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3
l l l
l l l l l l
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l
1080/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l
1080/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5
l l
l l
l l
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5
l l
l l
l l
VGA480 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2
l
SVGA 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0
l
XGA
1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9
l
l l
1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0
l
l l
1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3
l
1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1
l
MXGA 1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6
l
1280 x 720
1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5
l
1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5
l
1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8
l
1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6
l
1280 x 768
1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3
l
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5
l
1 280 x 768
*3
47.4 60.0 68.3
l
1280 x 800
1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0
l
l l
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5
l
l l
1
280 x 800
*3
49.3 59.9 71.0
l
l l
MSXGA 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0
l
SXGA
1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0
l
1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0
l
1366 x 768
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5
l
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0
l
SXGA+
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9
l
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0
l
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6
l
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8
l
WXGA+
1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5
l
1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8
l
UXGA60 1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0
l
WSXGA+
1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3
l
1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5
l
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5
l
1 920 x 1 080
*3
66.6 59.9 138.5
l
WUXGA
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3
l
l l
1 920 x 1 200
*3
74.0 60.0 154.0
l
l
l l
*1 Only for PT-DZ870E
*2 Supports half.
*3 VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant
Note
f DIGITAL LINK input compatible signal is the same as HDMI input compatible signal.
Chapter 6Appendix — Specications
ENGLISH - 183
Specications
The specications of the projector are as follows.
Power supply AC 120 V - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption
1 030 W (10 A - 5.2 A)
0.3 W when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO]
3 W when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
DLP chip
Size
PT-DZ870E 17 mm (0.67") (aspect ratio 16:10)
PT-DW830E 16.5 mm (0.65") (aspect ratio 16:10)
PT-DX100E 17.8 mm (0.7") (aspect ratio 4:3)
Display system 1-unit DLP chip, DLP type
Number of pixels
PT-DZ870E 2 304 000 pixels (1 920 x 1 200 dots)
PT-DW830E 1 024 000 pixels (1 280 x 800 dots)
PT-DX100E 786 432 pixels (1 024 x 768 dots)
Lens
*1
Electric zoom
PT-DZ870E 1.7 - 2.4:1
PT-DW830E, PT-DX100E 1.8 - 2.5:1
Electric focus
F = 1.7 - 1.9
f = 25.6 mm - 35.7 mm
Luminous lamp 420 W UHM lamp x 2
Light output
*2*3
PT-DZ870E, PT-DW830E 8 500 lm(ANSI)
PT-DX100E 10 000 lm(ANSI)
Contrast ratio
*3
10 000:1 (when [DYNAMIC IRIS] is set to [3])
Color system 7 standards (NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-N/PAL-M/SECAM/PAL60)
Projection screen size
*4
1.27 m (50") to 15.24 m (600")
Screen aspect ratio
PT-DZ870E, PT-DW830E 16:10
PT-DX100E 4:3
Projection method [FRONT/CEILING], [FRONT/FLOOR], [REAR/CEILING], [REAR/FLOOR]
Power cable length 3.0 m (118-1/8")
Outer case Molded plastic
Dimensions
Width 498 mm (19-19/32")
Height 200 mm (7-7/8") (with legs at shortest position)
Depth
PT-DZ870E, PT-DW830E,
PT-DX100E
556 mm (21-7/8") (including standard zoom lens)
PT-DZ870EL, PT-DW830EL,
PT-DX100EL
513 mm (20-3/16") (excluding optional lens)
Weight
PT-DZ870E, PT-DW830E,
PT-DX100E
Approx. 18.3 k] (40 lbs.)
*5
(including standard zoom lens)
PT-DZ870EL, PT-DW830EL,
PT-DX100EL
Approx. 17.6 k] (38.8 lbs.)
*5
(excluding optional lens)
Noise level
*3
40 dB
Operating
environment
Operating
environment
temperature
*6
0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F)
Operating
environment
humidity
10 % - 80 % (No condensation)
Remote
control
Power supply DC 3 V (AAA/R03 battery x 2)
Operating range Within approx. 30 m (98'5") (when operated directly in front of signal receiver)
Weight
102 ] (3.6 oz.) (including batteries)
Dimensions Width: 48 mm (1-7/8"), Height: 145 mm (5-23/32"), Depth: 27 mm (1-1/16")
*1 For PT-DZ870EL, PT-DW830EL, and PT-DX100EL, lenses are optional accessories.
*2 Value is for the supplied standard zoom lens. The value varies depending on the lens.
*3 Measurement, measuring conditions and method of notation all comply with ISO21118 international standards.
*4 When the ET-DLE055 lens is used, the maximum size is 5.08 m (200").
*5 Average value. Weight varies for each product.
*6 When using the projector at high altitudes (1 400 m (4 593') or higher – lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level), the operating environment
temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) - 40 °C (104 °F).
If the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [LAMP SELECT] is set to [DUAL], and [LAMP POWER] is set to [NORMAL], and the operating environment
temperature reaches 40 °C (104 °F) or higher (35 °C (95 °F) or higher when [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] is set to [ON]), the light output may drop by
approx. 20 % to protect the projector.
Chapter 6Appendix — Specications
184 - ENGLISH
r Applicable scanning frequency
Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 178) for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector.
For video signal
(including Y/C signal)
Horizontal: 15.75 kHz/15.63 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz/60 Hz
For RGB signal
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz, Vertical: 24 Hz to 120 Hz
PIAS (Panasonic Intelligent Auto Scanning) system
f Dot clock frequency: 162 MHz or less
For YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signal
f 525i (480i)
Horizontal: 15.75 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f 525p (480p)
Horizontal: 31.5 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f 750 (720)/60p
Horizontal: 45 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f 1125 (1035)/60i
Horizontal: 33.75 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/50i
Horizontal: 28.13 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/24sF
Horizontal: 27 kHz, Vertical: 48 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/30p
Horizontal: 33.75 kHz, Vertical: 30 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/50p
Horizontal: 56.25 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 625i (576i)
Horizontal: 15.63 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 625p (576p)
Horizontal: 31.25 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 750 (720)/50p
Horizontal: 37.5 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/60i
Horizontal: 33.75 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/24p
Horizontal: 27 kHz, Vertical: 24 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/25p
Horizontal: 28.13 kHz, Vertical: 25 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/60p
Horizontal: 67.5 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f The SYNC/HD and VD terminals do not support 3 value SYNC.
For DVI-D signal
525i (480i)
*1
, 625i (576i)
*1
, 525p (480p), 625p (576p), 750 (720)/60p,
750 (720)/50p, 1125 (1080)/60i, 1125 (1080)/50i, 1125 (1080)/24p,
1125 (1080)/24sF, 1125 (1080)/25p, 1125 (1080)/30p,
1125 (1080)/60p, 1125 (1080)/50p
f Displayable resolution: VGA to WUXGA (non-interlaced)
f Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz
For HDMI signal
525i (480i)
*1
, 625i (576i)
*1
, 525p (480p), 625p (576p), 750 (720)/60p,
750 (720)/50p, 1125 (1080)/60i, 1125 (1080)/50i, 1125 (1080)/24p,
1125 (1080)/24sF, 1125 (1080)/25p, 1125 (1080)/30p,
1125 (1080)/60p, 1125 (1080)/50p
f Displayable resolution: VGA to WUXGA (non-interlaced)
f Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz
For SDI signal
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
SD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 259 compliant
YC
B
C
R
4:2:2 10-bit
480i, 576i
Single link HD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 292 compliant
YP
B
P
R
4:2:2 10-bit
720/50p, 720/60p, 1035/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p,
1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p
3G-SDI signal SMPTE ST 424 compliant
YP
B
P
R
4:2:2 10-bit
1080/50p, 1080/60p
RGB 4:4:4 12-bit/10-bit
1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p, 1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p
*1 Pixel-Repetition signal (dot clock frequency 27.0 MHz) only
Note
f DIGITAL LINK input compatible signal is the same as HDMI input compatible signal.
Chapter 6Appendix — Specications
ENGLISH - 185
r Terminal
<RGB 1 IN> terminal
1 set (BNC x 5 (RGB/YP
B
P
R
/YC
B
C
R
/YC x 1))
RGB signal 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
SYNC/HD
TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
VD
TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
YP
B
P
R
signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, P
B
P
R
: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
Y/C signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p], C: 0.286 V [p-p] 75 Ω
<RGB 2 IN> terminal
1 set, high-density D-Sub 15 p (female)
RGB signal 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
SYNC/HD
TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
VD
TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
YP
B
P
R
signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, P
B
P
R
: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
<DVI-D IN> terminal 1 set, DVI-D 24 p, single link DVI 1.0 compliant, HDCP compatible
<HDMI IN> terminal 1 set, HDMI 19 pin, HDCP compatible, Deep Color compatible
<VIDEO IN> terminal 1 set, BNC 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω
<SDI IN> terminal
(Only for PT-DZ870E)
1 set (BNC)
SD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 259 compliant
HD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 292 compliant
3G-SDI signal SMPTE ST 424 compliant
<3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal
1 set (BNC)
During input setting TTL high impedance
During output setting TTL output: Maximum 10 mA
<3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal
1 set (BNC)
TTL output: Maximum 10 mA
<SERIAL IN>/ <SERIAL OUT>
terminal
D-Sub 9 p, 1 set each, RS-232C compliant, for computer control
<REMOTE 1 IN>/ <REMOTE 1
OUT> terminal
M3 stereo mini jack cable, 1 set each, for remote control (wired)/projector link control
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal 1 set, D-Sub 9 p, for external control
<DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal 1 set, RJ-45 network, for DIGITAL LINK connection, PJLink compatible, 100Base-TX, Art-Net compatible
Note
f The model numbers of accessories and optional components are subject to change without prior notice.
Chapter 6Appendix — Dimensions
186 - ENGLISH
Dimensions
Unit: mm
513 (20-3/16")
43 (1-11/16")
115.5 (4-9/16")
95 (3-3/4")
179.5 (7-1/16")
200 (7-7/8")
20.5 (13/16")
442 (17-13/32")
432 (17")
498 (19-19/32")
* The above dimensions are obtained when the standard zoom lens is attached.
* Actual dimensions may differ depending on the product.
Chapter 6Appendix — Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket
ENGLISH - 187
Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket
f When installing the projector to a ceiling, be sure to use the specied optional Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD120H (for high
ceilings), ET-PKD120S (for low ceilings), ET-PKD120B (Projector Mount Bracket)). Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD120H (for
high ceilings), ET-PKD120S (for low ceilings)) is used in combination with Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD120B (Projector Mount
Bracket)).
f When installing the projector, attach the drop-prevention kit included with the Ceiling Mount Bracket.
When the drop-prevention kit (Service Model No.: TTRA0214) is necessary, consult your dealer.
f Ask a qualied technician to do the installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling.
f Panasonic takes no responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of a ceiling mount bracket not manufactured by
Panasonic or the inappropriate choice of location for installation, even if the warranty period of the projector has not expired.
f Unused products must be removed promptly by a qualied technician.
f Use a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten bolts to their specied tightening torques. Do not use electric screwdrivers or
impact screwdrivers.
f Read the Installation Instructions for the Ceiling Mount Bracket for details.
f The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
M6
Bottom view
Model No. of Ceiling Mount Bracket: ET-PKD120H (for high ceilings)
ET-PKD120S (for low ceilings)
12 mm (15/32")
Torque: 4±0.5 N·m
ET-PKD120B (Projector Mount Bracket)
Index
188 - ENGLISH
0 – 9
[3D 24Hz IMAGE POSITION] 92
[3D 24Hz IMAGE PROJECTION]
92
[3D FRAME DELAY]
93
[3D INPUT FORMAT]
91
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS]
94
[3D SETTINGS]
68, 90
[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]
91
[3D SYNC SETTING]
90
[3D SYSTEM SETTING]
90
[3D TEST MODE]
93
[3D TEST PATTERN]
93
A
Accessories 20
<AC IN> terminal
27, 54
Adjusting adjustable feet
4 6
[ADVANCED MENU]
67, 84
Air lter
159
Art-Net
18, 168
[Art-Net SETUP]
136
[ASPECT]
78
Automatic setup function
6 3
[AUTO SETUP]
97
<AUTO SETUP> button
Projector body
27, 63
Remote control
25, 63
[AUTO SIGNAL]
97
B
[BACK COLOR] 103
[BLANKING]
84
[BRIGHTNESS]
71
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]
111
C
Cautions on use 19
Cautions when installing
1 6
Cautions when transporting
1 6
Ceiling Mount Bracket
187
[CLAMP POSITION]
85
[CLOCK PHASE]
80
[CLOSED CAPTION SETTING]
102
[COLOR]
72
[COLOR CORRECTION]
9 6
[COLOR MATCHING]
95
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
72
Connecting the power cord
54
Connecting to the projector with a cable
30
Connection
49
[CONTRAST]
71
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
133
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
131
[COOLING CONDITION]
109
Crestron RoomView
137, 153
[CUT OFF]
106
D
[DATE AND TIME] 121
<DEFAULT> button
Remote control
25, 66
Deleting the registered signal
127
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]
84
[DIGITAL INTERFACE BOX]
136
DIGITAL LINK
18
<DIGITAL LINK> button
Projector body
27, 62
Remote control
25, 62
[DIGITAL LINK IN]
99
[DIGITAL LINK MODE]
134
[DIGITAL LINK SETUP]
134
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]
135
Dimensions
186
Display language
68, 89
[DISPLAY OPTION]
68, 95
[DISPLAY SETTING]
131
Disposal
18
[DLP Link]
90
<DVI-D> button
Projector body
27, 62
Remote control
25, 62
[DVI-D IN]
98
[DYNAMIC IRIS]
75
E
[EDGE BLENDING] 8 6
<ENTER> button
Projector body
27
Remote control
25
Expanding signal lock-in range
128
F
Filter indicator 157
<FOCUS> button
Remote control
25, 58
[FRAME LOCK]
88
[FRAME RESPONSE]
87
[FREEZE]
105
Function button
6 3
<FUNCTION> button
Remote control
25, 63
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
121
G
[GAMMA] 74
[GEOMETRY(2D)]
80
H
<HDMI> button
Projector body
27, 62
Remote control
25, 62
[HDMI IN]
99
[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE]
109
I
<ID SET> button
Remote control
25, 29
[INITIALIZE]
123
Initial setting
22
[INPUT RESOLUTION]
85
Installation mode
32
K
[KEYSTONE] 83
[KEYSTONE(3D)]
82
L
Lamp indicator 157
[LAMP POWER]
111
[LAMP RELAY]
110
[LAMP SELECT]
109
Lamp unit cover
2 6
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
92
<LENS> button
Projector body
27
[LENS CALIBRATION]
122
List of compatible signals
178
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]
123
M
Main menu 66
Main power switch
27, 55
Maintenance
159
<MENU> button
Projector body
27, 65
Remote control
25, 65
Menu item
6 7
N
Navigating through the menu 6 5
[NETWORK]
70, 134
Network connections
137
[NETWORK CONTROL]
136
[NETWORK SETUP]
135
[NETWORK STATUS]
136
[NOISE REDUCTION]
75
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
120
O
<ON SCREEN> button
Remote control
25, 61
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
101
On-screen menu
6 5
Optional accessories
21
P
[PICTURE] 67, 71
[PICTURE MODE]
71
[P IN P]
69, 124
P IN P function
124
[POSITION]
67, 78
Power cord
54
Power indicator
54
Power on button
Projector body
27
Remote control
25
Power standby button
Projector body
27
Remote control
25
Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket
187
Precautions for use
1 6
Projecting
58
[PROJECTION METHOD]
108
Projector body
26
[PROJECTOR ID]
108
[PROJECTOR SETUP]
69, 108
Protecting the registered signal
128
R
[RASTER POSITION] 88
Read this rst!
2
Registering new signals
127
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal
28
<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal
28
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
176
[REMOTE2 MODE]
121
Remote control
25
Remote control operations
6 1
Removing/attaching the projection lens
47
Renaming the registered signal
127
Replacing the air lter unit
162
Replacing the lamp unit
160
Replacing the unit
160
Resetting to the factory default
6 6
<RGB1/2> button
Remote control
25, 62
<RGB1/RGB2> button
Projector body
27, 62
[RGB IN]
98
RoomView
153
[RS-232C]
118, 171
S
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE] 94
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]
122
[SCHEDULE]
11 6
[SCREEN SETTING]
9 6
<SDI> button
Projector body
27, 62
Remote control
25, 62
[SDI IN]
100
Security
18
[SECURITY]
69, 130
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
130
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]
130
Selecting the input signal
58
<SERIAL IN> terminal
171
<SERIAL OUT> terminal
171
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
123
Setting remote control ID numbers
29
Setting up
32
[SHARPNESS]
75
[SHIFT]
78
<SHIFT> button
Remote control
25, 58
<SHUTTER> button
Projector body
27, 61
Remote control
25, 61
[SHUTTER SETTING]
104
[SIGNAL LIST]
69, 127
Specications
183
sRGB-compliant video
77
[STANDBY MODE]
11 6
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]
117
[STARTUP LOGO]
103
[STATUS]
119
<STATUS> button
Remote control
25, 62
[SUB CLOCK PHASE]
93
Sub memory
129
Switching off the projector
57
Switching on the projector
55
Switching the input signal
6 2
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
74
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
7 6
T
Temperature indicator 157
[TEST PATTERN]
69, 126
<TEST PATTERN> button
Remote control
25, 63
[TEXT CHANGE]
131
[TINT]
72
Troubleshooting
164
Two window
177
Index
Index
ENGLISH - 189
U
[UNIFORMITY] 103
Upgrade Kit
178
V
<VIDEO> button
Projector body
27, 62
Remote control
25, 62
W
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] 105
[WHITE GAIN]
74
Z
[ZOOM] 79
<ZOOM> button
Remote control
25, 58
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used
electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household
waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please
take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the
Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources
and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could
otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact
your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the
items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier
for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with
the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site : http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/
© Panasonic Corporation 2013
W0613NS0 -YI
4


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Panasonic PT-DX100E at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Panasonic PT-DX100E in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 21,13 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Panasonic PT-DX100E

Panasonic PT-DX100E User Manual - German - 194 pages

Panasonic PT-DX100E User Manual - French - 194 pages

Panasonic PT-DX100E User Manual - Italian - 192 pages

Panasonic PT-DX100E User Manual - Spanish - 195 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info